Specifications | Cadillac 2009 STS Automobile User Manual

2009 Cadillac STS/STS-V Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-6
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-7
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-28
Airbag System
......................................... 1-51
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-66
.....................................
2-1
Features and Controls
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-13
Windows ................................................. 2-18
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-21
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-25
Mirrors .................................................... 2-38
Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-42
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-50
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-53
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-60
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-60
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-61
M
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-48
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-55
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-72
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-97
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle
....... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-29
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under
the Hood
............................................. 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-47
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-48
Front Axle
............................................... 5-49
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-50
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-51
Windshield Replacement
........................... 5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-52
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
................................... 5-105
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-112
Electrical System
.................................... 5-113
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-124
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-16
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the name STS
are registered trademarks and the name STS-V
is a trademark of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25795636 A First Printing
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the
Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
©
2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this” or
“Do not let this happen.”
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
iv
Section 1
Seats and Restraint System
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-2
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Heated and Ventilated Seats ............................1-3
Power Reclining Seatbacks ..............................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Rear Seats .......................................................1-6
Heated Seats .................................................1-6
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door .........................1-6
Safety Belts .....................................................1-7
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-7
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-12
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-27
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-27
Child Restraints .............................................1-28
Older Children ..............................................1-28
Infants and Young Children ............................1-31
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-35
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-37
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-47
Airbag System ...............................................1-51
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-53
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-56
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-57
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-57
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ...................................................1-58
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-59
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-64
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-64
Restraint System Check ..................................1-66
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-66
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-67
1-1
Front Seats
If the vehicle has the memory feature, you can program
and recall memory settings for seat positions. See
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-77.
Power Seats
Power Lumbar
The power seat controls
are located on the outboard
side of the seats.
To adjust the seat:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.
• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-4.
1-2
On vehicles with power
lumbar, the control is
located on the outboard
sides of the front seat(s).
To increase or decrease support, press and hold the
front or rear of the control.
To raise or lower the position of the lumbar support,
press and hold the top or bottom of the control.
Vehicles with a memory function allow seat settings to be
saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel on page 2-77 for more information.
Heated Seats
On vehicles with heated
front seats, the buttons are
located on the climate
control panel.
A light bar in the climate control display shows the setting:
high, medium, or low. The longest bar shows the high
range and the shortest bar shows the low range.
The heated seat will automatically shut off when the
vehicle is turned off.
Heated and Ventilated Seats
On vehicles with this feature, the buttons are located on
the climate control panel.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to heat the
seat and seatback.
{
z (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press the up or down
arrow once to turn on the heated seat at the highest or
lowest setting.
Press the up or down arrows a second time to raise or
lower the setting. Keep pressing the down arrow until the
indicator on the climate control display is off to turn off the
heated seat.
(Ventilated Seat): Press to ventilate the seat.
A light bar in the climate control display shows
the setting; high, medium, or low.
Press either button to start that feature at the highest
setting. Each press of the button, decreases the setting.
To turn the feature off, press the button until the light
turns off.
The heated or ventilated seats shut off when the vehicle
is turned off.
1-3
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The front seats have
power reclining seatbacks.
Use the vertical power
seat control located on
the outboard side of
the seat to operate them.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
1-4
Head Restraints
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even if when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do their job when
reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do no have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is
at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
1-5
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press
the button, located on
the top of the seatback,
and push the head
restraint down.
The front head restraints can also tilt forward or
rearward.
Rear Seats
Heated Seats
If the vehicle has this feature, the controls are located
on the center console.
Pressing this button will turn the heated seat on at the
highest setting. Each press of the button will decrease the
seat temperature or turn the seat off. The light indicates
which setting the seat is on, 3 being the highest.
The engine must be running for the seats to operate
and will shut off when the ignition is turned off.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
The vehicle has a pass-through door that provides
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door” under Trunk on page 2-15.
1-6
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
{ CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-57
for additional information.
1-7
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-8
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-9
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-10
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-11
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-31. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-12
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-13
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-14
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in
the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
1-21
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
1-22
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
6. This safety belt has a feature that will reduce
the tension of the safety belt on the occupant’s
shoulder if the vehicle is on. To set this feature,
gently pull on the belt, or lean forward and then sit
back. The belt will retract and rest lightly against
the occupant.
When the safety belt is unbuckled or when the
vehicle is turned off, the tension reducer will
deactivate. The belt should go back out of the way.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the height
adjuster up just by pushing
up on the shoulder belt
guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-23
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if
the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
belts in a side crash.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to
the safety belt:
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-67.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
1-24
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-25
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the
loop of the elastic cord exposed.
1-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should
use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-27
Child Restraints
Older Children
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 1-21 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-28
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-21.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-29
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-30
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they
should have the protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
1-31
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-32
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-33
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the
harness.
1-35
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-36
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-39 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-37
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
1-38
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-59 for
additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Lower Anchors
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and
its attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-39
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-40
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
1-41
The top tether anchors are located under covers on the
rear seatback filler panel. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-37 for
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
1-42
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during a
crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-43
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Open the top tether anchor cover to expose
the anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1-44
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
under the head restraint
and in between the
head restraint posts.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and
in between the headrest
or head restraint posts.
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 1-37.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-45
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-46
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-37.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-59 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-59 for more information,
including important safety information.
1-47
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
1-48
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-59 for
additional information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-59.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-49
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-50
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-59 for more information.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
Airbag System
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
The vehicle has the following airbags:
•
•
•
•
A frontal airbag for the driver.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
1-51
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-56.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
1-52
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink
of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on page 1-28
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-31.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-58
for more information.
1-53
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
1-54
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
1-55
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
1-56
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-51.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can
vary with specific vehicle design.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to a
vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle
hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
airbags, deployment is determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there
are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near
the side windows that have occupant seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 1-56 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-57
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-57.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
1-58
{ CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the overhead console
when you start your vehicle.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-17.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the word
OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be
visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-59.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
1-59
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1-60
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-59.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position on page 1-47.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 1-5.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check
with your dealer/retaier.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to
be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind
you that the airbag is active.
1-61
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
1-62
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel
cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in
the right front passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-58 for more on this, including
important safety information.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment other than any that GM has approved for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64 for more
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-63
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-15.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
1-64
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-59.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
1-65
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-58 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-57 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-118.
1-66
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-57.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-58.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-67
✍ NOTES
1-68
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Keyless Access System ...................................2-4
Keyless Access System Operation ....................2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ....................................2-11
Doors and Locks ............................................2-13
Door Locks ..................................................2-13
Power Door Locks ........................................2-13
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-14
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-14
Lockout Protection ........................................2-15
Trunk ..........................................................2-15
Windows ........................................................2-18
Power Windows ............................................2-19
Sun Visors ...................................................2-21
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-21
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-21
Valet Lockout Switch .....................................2-23
Immobilizer ..................................................2-24
Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-24
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-25
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-25
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-26
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-27
Starting the Engine .......................................2-27
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-29
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-30
Parking Brake ..............................................2-33
Shifting Into Park ..........................................2-34
Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-35
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-35
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-36
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-37
Mirrors ...........................................................2-38
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-38
Compass .....................................................2-38
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-40
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-40
Park Tilt Mirrors ............................................2-41
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-41
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-41
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Object Detection Systems ...............................2-42
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) ...........................................2-42
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) .........................2-44
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ......................2-48
OnStar® System .............................................2-50
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-53
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) .............................2-54
2-2
Storage Areas ................................................2-60
Glove Box ...................................................2-60
Cupholders ..................................................2-60
Center Console Storage .................................2-60
Convenience Net ..........................................2-60
Sunroof .........................................................2-60
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-61
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ..........2-77
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter is dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they could be
seriously injured or killed if caught in the path
of a closing window. Do not leave the keyless
access transmitter in a vehicle with children.
2-3
This key, located inside the
keyless access transmitter,
can be used for all locks.
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System with
pushbutton start. See Ignition Positions on page 2-26
for information on starting the vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/or
key, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle.
You may even have to damage your vehicle to get
in. Be sure you have a spare transmitter and/or key.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Service on page 7-7.
Keyless Access System
Press the button (A) near
the bottom of the keyless
access transmitter to
remove the key. Never
pull the key without
pressing the button.
The Keyless Access System operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the keyless access transmitter
range, try this:
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. It may be necessary to
stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” under Keyless Access System
Operation on page 2-5.
• Make sure that an electronic device such as a
cellular phone or lap top computer is not causing
interference.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
Keyless Access System Operation
The Keyless Access System transmitter functions
will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
The Keyless Access System lets you lock and
unlock the doors without removing the remote
transmitter from your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc.
The keyless access transmitter must be within
3 feet (1 m) of the door or trunk being opened.
Keyless Unlocking
Pull the door handle to unlock and open the door(s)
if the keyless access transmitter is within range.
See Door Locks on page 2-13 for additional information.
To customize which doors unlock when pulling the driver
or passenger handle, see “Keyless FT (Front) Door
Unlock” and “Keyless Doors Unlock” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 2-61 for additional information.
Keyless Locking
The doors lock after several seconds if all doors are
closed and at least one keyless access transmitter
has been removed from the interior of the vehicle.
To customize whether the doors automatically lock
when exiting the vehicle, see ″Keyless Lock Delay″
under Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61 for
additional information.
2-5
Keyless Trunk Opening
To open the trunk with the keyless access transmitter
within range, press the trunk release button located
above the license plate on the trunk. See Trunk
on page 2-15 for additional information.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Keyless Access System on page 2-4.
If the engine is off, the windows can be closed from
outside the vehicle. Press and hold Q for more than
two seconds to close any window. If any window
is unable to close completely, it reverses and the horn
sounds. See “Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature”
under Power Windows on page 2-19 for more
information.
See “Lights Flash at Lock” and “Horn Chirps at Lock”
under Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61 to change
the feedback feature.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
The turn signals flash twice. Press K twice within
five seconds to unlock all the doors. The interior lamps
may come on.
See “Lights Flash at Unlock” and “Ext. (Exterior) Lights at
Unlock” under Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61 to
change the feedback feature.
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the doors. The light on
the front doors comes on and the turn signals flash.
If Q is pressed twice, the horn will also sound.
2-6
Vehicles with the memory feature can be programmed to
recall memory settings when K is pressed on the keyless
access transmitter. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel on page 2-77 for more information.
/
(Remote Start): Press to operate the remote start
feature. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-11.
G
(Trunk): Press and hold to unlock the trunk. If
the engine is running, the shift lever must be in P (Park).
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
L
A new transmitter can be programmed to the vehicle
when there is one recognized transmitter. For vehicles
sold in Canada, two recognized transmitters are
required to program a new transmitter.
(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three times and
the turn signal lamps flash three times. Press and hold
L for three seconds to sound the panic alarm. The horn
sounds and the turn signal lamps flash for 30 seconds.
Press and release L again to cancel the panic alarm.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on top of it, ″1″ or ″2″.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1
will be recalled when using the transmitter labeled ″1″,
if enabled through the vehicle personalization. See
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-77
and Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Both the recognized and new transmitters must be
with you.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key cylinder located
on the outside of the driver door.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within
five seconds.
5. The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays
READY FOR FOB 2, 3 or 4.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only keyless access transmitters programmed to
this vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen,
a replacement can be purchased and programmed
through your dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be
reprogrammed so that lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work. Each vehicle can have up to
four transmitters programmed to it.
2-7
8. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket
and press K twice on each newly programmed
transmitter to complete the process.
9. To program additional transmitters, repeat Step 6.
Press Acc. on the ignition switch if programming is
complete.
Programming without a Recognized
Transmitter
6. Place the new transmitter into the transmitter
pocket, located inside the center console storage
area located between the driver and front passenger
seats, with the transmitter buttons facing the front
of the vehicle.
7. A beep sounds once programming in complete.
The DIC displays READY FOR 3 or 4, or
MAX # FOBS LEARNED.
2-8
This procedure requires three ten minutes cycles to
complete the programming process. United States
owners are permitted to program a new transmitter
to their vehicle when a recognized transmitter is not
available. The Canadian immobilizer standard requires
that Canadian owners see their dealer/retailer for
programming new transmitters when two recognized
transmitters are not available.
1. The vehicle must be off.
5. The DIC message displays OFF/ACC TO LEARN.
6. Press Acc. on the ignition switch.
7. The DIC reads WAIT 10 MINUTES and counts
down to zero.
8. The DIC displays OFF/ACC TO LEARN again.
9. Press Acc. on the ignition switch.
10. Steps 7, 8 and 9 will be repeated two more times.
11. A beep sounds and the DIC reads READY
FOR FOB 1. All previously known transmitter
programming has been erased.
12. A beep sounds once programming in complete.
The DIC displays READY FOR FOB #2.
2. Place the new transmitter into the transmitter
pocket, located inside the center console storage
area located between the driver and front passenger
seats, with the transmitter buttons facing the front
of the vehicle.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder
located on the driver door.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within
five seconds.
13. To program additional transmitters, take
transmitter 1 out of the transmitter pocket and
place transmitter 2 in the pocket. Up to four
transmitters can be programmed. The DIC will
then display MAX # FOBS LEARNED and will
exit the programming mode.
14. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket
and press K twice on each newly programmed
transmitter to complete the process.
2-9
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
If the transmitter battery is weak, the DIC may display
NO FOBS DETECTED when trying to start the vehicle.
To start the vehicle, place the transmitter in the center
console storage area transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing to the front of the vehicle. Then, with the vehicle in
P (Park) OR N (Neutral), press the brake pedal and / .
Replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible.
Change the transmitter battery if the DIC displays
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW.
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the slot on the side of the transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-10
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature allows you to start the engine from outside
the vehicle.
Before the remote vehicle start system can be operated,
it must be turned on through the vehicle personalization
system.
You can also program the remote vehicle start system to
start up the vehicle’s automatic climate control system. If
this feature is turned on, the system monitors the outside
temperature and turns on the rear window defogger, front
window defogger, and heated or ventilated seats, if your
vehicle has them. See “Personal Settings Menu” under
Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61.
/
(Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the remote keyless access transmitter at the
vehicle.
2. Press the transmitter’s Q , release it, and then
immediately press and hold the transmitter’s / for at
least three seconds or until the vehicle’s turn signal
lamps flash. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended
one time.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.
To manually shut off a remote start, do one of the
following:
• Aim the keyless access transmitter at the vehicle and
press the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Press the Acc. button (ignition switch). See Ignition
Positions on page 2-26.
• Turn on the valet lockout switch. See Valet Lockout
Switch on page 2-23.
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,
press the brake pedal and press the start button on the
keyless ignition switch to transition from remote start
operation to normal vehicle operation.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use
of remote starters. For example, laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
2-11
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature will not operate if any of the
following occur:
The remote start feature provides two separate starts,
each with 10 minutes of engine running. If you press
the lock button and then hold the remote start button
on the keyless access transmitter again for at least
three seconds before the first 10 minutes of engine
running time has expired, 10 minutes is added to the
remaining minutes. For example, if the remote start is
initiated again after five minutes of the engine run time,
10 minutes is added and you now have 15 minutes with
the engine running. Once two remote starts or 20 minutes
of the engine running have been provided, the vehicle
must be started using the keyless access with pushbutton
start feature, if the engine needs to be restarted. See
Starting the Engine on page 2-27 for more information
regarding the keyless ignition.
• The check engine light is displayed. See “Check
Engine Light” under Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-66.
•
•
•
•
•
The valet lockout switch is on.
The keyless access transmitter is in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s hood is open.
The vehicle personalization feature is not enabled.
An unauthorized vehicle entry or a vehicle theft
was attempted.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the keyless
access transmitter functions will have an increased
range of operation. However, the range may be
less while the vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Keyless Access
System on page 2-4.
2-12
Doors and Locks
From the outside:
• Pull the door handle. If you have the keyless
Door Locks
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
access transmitter, the vehicle recognizes the
transmitter and automatically unlocks the door.
• Another way to lock or unlock the vehicle, is to
press the lock or unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 2-61 for information on how to program
the keyless access feature.
From the inside:
• Press the power door lock switch located on each
front door. See Power Door Locks on page 2-13
for more information.
• Push down or pull up on the manual door lock knob
for the rear door. The knob is located at the top of
the door panel near the window.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
front doors.
"
(Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
2-13
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
The vehicle was programmed so when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is moved
out of P (Park), all the doors will lock.
The front doors can still be opened from the inside while
the doors are locked. If a rear passenger needs to exit the
vehicle, have that person use the manual knob or use the
power door lock switch on either front door. When the
door is closed again, it will not lock automatically. Use
the manual knob or the power door lock switch to lock
the door.
Rear Door Security Locks
The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
Open the rear doors to
access the security locks
on the inside edge of
each door.
The doors were also pre-programmed to unlock every
time the shift lever is moved into P (Park).
The power door locks can be programmed through the
radio display. The radio display allows you to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For more information
on programming, see Vehicle Personalization on
page 2-61.
2-14
To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to
the horizontal position. The door can only be opened from
the outside with the door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
The vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn
three times and unlock the driver’s door when all doors
are closed and there is a keyless access transmitter
inside the interior of the vehicle. When the driver’s
door is reopened, the key in reminder chime will sound
continuously. The vehicle will remain locked only when at
least one transmitter has been removed from the vehicle
and both doors are closed. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 2-61.
Trunk
{ CAUTION:
Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle if it is
driven with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the seal between
the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
(Continued)
2-15
Trunk Lid Release
There are three ways to open the trunk lid.
• V (Trunk Lid Release): Press this button
located on the driver’s door. The vehicle must
be in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the valet mode
turned off. To disable valet mode, see Valet
Lockout Switch on page 2-23.
• Press the trunk lid release button on the keyless
access transmitter. See Keyless Access System
Operation on page 2-5. The vehicle must be
in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the valet mode
turned off.
• Squeeze the trunk release button located on the
rear of the trunk lid above the license plate. If the
vehicle is locked, the keyless access transmitter
must be within three feet (one meter) of the trunk
opening for it to be recognized and allow the trunk to
open. If the vehicle doors are unlocked, the trunk is
also unlocked and the keyless access transmitter
does not have to be at the rear of the vehicle to open
it. The vehicle must be in P (Park) and the valet
mode turned off.
2-16
If your vehicle has lost battery power, you can still
access the trunk by unlocking and lowering the rear seat
pass-through door and pulling the emergency trunk
release handle.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
To open the door:
1. Pull the rear seat armrest down.
2. If the door is locked, insert the key into the lock and
turn it counterclockwise.
3. Press the button above the lock and lower the door.
To open the trunk lid, pull the emergency trunk release
handle located in the trunk on the other side of the
door opening. See “Emergency Trunk Release Handle”
following.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
inside the trunk near the back of the rear seats. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull down
the release handle to open the trunk from the inside of
the vehicle.
2-17
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-18
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The power window switches are located on the armrest
near each window. Press the front of the switch to the first
position to open the window to the desired level. Lift up
the front of the switch to the first position to close the
window.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows you to use the power windows once the engine
has been turned off. For more information, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-27.
2-19
Express-Down/Up Window
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
Any window can be lowered or raised all the way
without holding the switch.
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause
the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to
normal operation once the obstruction or condition is
removed.
Press the front of the window switch to the second
position and release to activate the express-down
feature. To stop the window, briefly pull up the switch.
Lift the front of the switch briefly to activate the
express-up feature. To stop the window, briefly
press the switch.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, each window must
be reprogrammed for the express-up feature to work.
To program each window:
1. With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY,
or while RAP is active, close all doors.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window has fully opened.
3. Continue holding the switch for approximately
two seconds.
4. Pull up the power window switch until the window is
fully closed.
Repeat the process for all windows.
2-20
{ CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all people
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up in the express position. The window
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch
is released, the express mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Window Lockout
Theft-Deterrent Systems
o (Window Lockout): Press to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button illuminates,
indicating that the feature is in use. The rear windows
can still be raised or lowered using the driver’s window
switches. To restore power to the rear windows, press
the button again.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
The front passenger window can be programmed
to be disabled using the window lockout button.
See Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61.
Your vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system.
Secure Car Feature
The windows can be closed by pressing the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter. See Keyless Access
System Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
If any window is unable to close completely, it reverses
and the horn chirps. See “Anti-Pinch Feature” previously.
The engine must be off to operate this feature.
Sun Visors
Theft-Deterrent System
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security
light will flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrent
system.
Swing down the visor or detach it from the center mount
and move to the side to block out glare. The visors also
have side-to-side slide capability for greater coverage.
Pull the visor down and lift the cover. Move the slide
switch up or down to brighten or dim the lamp.
2-21
To arm the system:
• Press the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter. If the door is closed when the lock button
is pressed, the security light will stay illuminated
for 30 seconds. After the security light goes off, the
theft-deterrent system is armed. Pressing the lock
button twice will arm the system immediately.
If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access
transmitter and the trunk lid, hood or a door is open
or not closed completely, the security light will flash
for 60 seconds and then turn off. The theft-deterrent
system is armed but the alarm will not sound if
the trunk lid, hood or door that was not closed
completely is tampered with or opened. The alarm
will sound for the trunk lid, hood or a door that was
completely closed at the time the vehicle was locked
using the keyless access transmitter.
• Exit the vehicle and lock the door with the power
door lock switch or lock button on the keyless access
transmitter. The security light should flash. Close the
door. The security light will stop flashing and stay
on. After 30 seconds the light should turn off, the
theft-deterrent system is armed.
• If Passive Arming is activated through the vehicle
personalization feature, the system will arm
automatically after you close the door and take at
least one keyless access transmitter with you. The
security light will turn on. After 60 seconds the light
should turn off. The theft-deterrent system is armed.
See Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61.
If a door, hood, or the trunk is opened without the
keyless access transmitter, the horn will sound for
30 seconds and the lamps will flash for two minutes.
The vehicle cannot be started without a keyless access
transmitter.
The Theft-Deterrent system will not arm if:
• The key is used to turn the key cylinder to the lock
position.
• The driver’s door is locked using the power door
lock switch after the doors are closed.
The vehicle can be programmed to automatically unlock
the doors and disarm the theft-deterrent system when
you approach the vehicle and the keyless access
transmitter is with you. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 2-61.
Pressing the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter or using the key to unlock the driver’s door
disarms the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a door
any other way while the system is armed will activate
the alarm.
2-22
Testing the Alarm
Valet Lockout Switch
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch
or the keyless access transmitter and close the
door. Wait about 30 seconds until the security light
goes off.
3. Reach in and open the door using the inside door
handle. The horn will sound and the exterior lamps
will flash.
You can turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button
on the keyless access transmitter or by starting the car.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-123. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
Theft-Deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
9
(Off): Press to turn the lockout feature off and allow
the trunk to be opened with either the keyless access
transmitter or the trunk release button located on
the driver’s door.
R
(On): Press to turn the lockout feature on. The trunk
cannot be unlocked or opened. When the valet lockout
feature is on, the remote start feature and the Universal
Home Remote transmitter will be disabled
Lock the glove box with the key to further secure the
vehicle.
See Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5 and
Trunk on page 2-15 for additional information.
2-23
Immobilizer
Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
1. This device may not cause interference.
The system is automatically armed when the ignition is
turned off.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition
is turned to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and a valid
transmitter is found in the vehicle.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-24
The security light comes on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
The system has one or more keyless access
transmitters that are matched to an immobilizer control
unit in the vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless
access transmitter starts the vehicle. The vehicle
may not start if the keyless access transmitter is
damaged.
If the engine does not start and the security light comes
on, there may be a problem with the immobilizer
system. Press the START button again.
If the vehicle does not start and the keyless access
transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another
keyless access transmitter. Or, place the transmitter in
the transmitter pocket. See “NO FOBS DETECTED”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for
additional information. Check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-123. If the engine still does
not start with the other transmitter, the vehicle needs
service. If the engine does start, the first transmitter may
be faulty. See your dealer/retailer or have a new keyless
access transmitter programmed to the vehicle.
The immobilizer system can learn new or replacement
keyless access transmitters. Up to four keyless access
transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle.
To program additional transmitters, see “Matching
transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless Access
System Operation on page 2-5.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting
to brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer (Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling) on
page 4-31 or Towing a Trailer (Vehicles With
Heavy Duty Cooling) on page 4-32 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-25
Ignition Positions
The vehicle has an
electronic keyless ignition
with pushbutton start.
If the start button does not work, the vehicle may be
near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference
to the keyless access system. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-79 for more information.
9 /Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY):
Press to turn the engine
off in any gear. If the shifter is in P (Park), RAP will
engage if all doors are closed. RAP will turn off when
a front door is opened. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-27 for more information.
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle must be running or
in ACCESSORY mode and the regular brake pedal
must be applied.
/
(START): Press to start the engine with your foot
on the brake pedal. The shifter must be in P (Park)
or N (Neutral) and the keyless access transmitter
must be in the vehicle.
2-26
If the engine is off, press this button to turn on the
accessory mode. ACCESSORY ACTIVE will display on
the Driver Information Center (DIC). Accessory mode
allows use of the audio system and windshield wipers.
Accessory mode must be used if the vehicle must
be towed or in motion when the engine is not running.
After the vehicle has been in accessory mode for
more than 20 minutes, the vehicle will enter RAP or turn
off, depending on if the doors are opened or closed.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The keyless access transmitter must be inside the
vehicle for the ignition to work.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
20 minutes after the engine is turned off:
Cell phone chargers can interfere with the operation of
the Keyless Access System. Battery chargers should
not be plugged in when starting or turning off the engine.
• Audio System
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• Power Windows
Power to these accessories will work up to 20 minutes
or until one of the front doors is opened. For an additional
20 minutes of operation, close all the doors and press
Acc. to place the vehicle in accessory mode. Press the
button again to return to RAP.
Starting the Engine
To place the transmission in the proper gear:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral).
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To start the vehicle, do the following:
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
START button located on the instrument panel.
If there is not a keyless access transmitter in
the vehicle or if there is something causing
interference with it, the DIC will display NO FOBS
DETECTED. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-79 for more information.
2. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the
button and the engine cranks automatically until
it starts. If the battery in the keyless access
transmitter is weak, the DIC displays KEY FOB
BATTERY LOW. You can still drive the vehicle.
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
System Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
If the fob battery is dead, you need to insert the
fob into the fob slot to enable engine starting.
See “No Fobs Detected” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-79.
2-27
3. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
4. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again to let
the cranking motor cool down.
If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
while cranking for up to 15 seconds maximum.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by pressing the START button immediately
after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
2-28
When the engine starts, let go of the accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline
from the engine.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine and
protects components. Once cranking has been initiated,
the engine continues cranking for a few seconds or until
the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start, cranking
automatically stops after 15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system
also prevents cranking if the engine is already running.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Stopping the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) and press the
Acc. button located on the instrument panel. If the
shifter is not in P (Park), the engine shuts off and the
vehicle goes into the Accessory Mode. The DIC
displays SHIFT TO PARK. Once the shifter is moved
to P (Park), the vehicle turns off.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
The DIC displays NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?, if the
keyless access transmitter is not detected inside the
vehicle when it is turned off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
For the 3.6L V6 and 4.4L V8 engine, the cord is
located in the front of the engine compartment,
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
For the 4.6L V8 engine, the cord is located in the
engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle
near the inner fender and above the strut.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for
more information.
3. You must remove the plastic cap to access
the plug.
4. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles with
an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least
four hours before starting. Some models have an internal
thermostat in the cord which will prevent engine coolant
heater operation at temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).
{ CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
2-29
5. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged
in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer
in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for
the best advice on this.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
2-30
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 2-34. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer (Vehicles Without Heavy
Duty Cooling) on page 4-31 or Towing a Trailer
(Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling) on page 4-32.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park)
before starting the engine. The vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock control system.
You must fully apply your regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before you can
shift from P (Park) when the vehicle is running.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on page 2-35.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use R (Reverse)
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission.
See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow on page 4-23 for additional information.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
You can also use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear
and have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 4-15.
2-31
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift
Control (DSC), you could damage the vehicle.
Always upshift when necessary while using DSC.
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows you shift an automatic
transmission similar to a manual transmission.
To use the DSC feature:
1. Move the shift lever to the right from D (Drive) into
the DSC area.
When in DSC mode, the
sport symbol will appear
in the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward
to downshift.
When using the DSC
mode, the number
displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC)
indicates the gear that
the transmission is in.
See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-72
for more information on
the DIC.
When starting the vehicle from a stopped condition,
only 1 (First) and 2 (Second) gear may be used.
While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer
shifting and increased performance. You can use this for
sport driving or when climbing/descending hills to stay in
gear longer or to down shift for more power or engine
braking.
The vehicle will remain in sport mode if the
shift lever is not moved. Sport mode will shift
automatically but remain in a gear longer then it
would in normal driving mode based on braking
and acceleration.
2-32
The transmission will only allow you to shift into
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will
not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the
engine RPM is too high.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the selected gear
will flash multiple times, indicating that the transmission
has not shifted gears.
The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear
selected and will automatically downshift when the
vehicle comes to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off and passing.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located on the lower portion
of the instrument panel to
the left of the steering
wheel.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it does
not, you need to have the vehicle serviced. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-62 for more information.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down, then push the parking brake pedal. When you
release the park brake pedal, the parking brake
releases.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer (Vehicles Without Heavy Duty
Cooling) on page 4-31 or Towing a Trailer (Vehicles
With Heavy Duty Cooling) on page 4-32 for more
information.
The vehicle has a push-to-release parking brake pedal.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
then push the parking brake pedal down.
2-33
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer (Vehicles
Without Heavy Duty Cooling) on page 4-31 or
Towing a Trailer (Vehicles With Heavy Duty
Cooling) on page 4-32.
To shift into P (Park), use the following steps:
3. With your foot still holding the brake pedal down,
set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-33 for more information.
4. Turn the ignition off.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing the
button on the front of the shift lever while pushing
the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
Release the button.
2-34
If you leave the vehicle with the engine running, the
vehicle must be in P (Park) and the parking brake set.
After shifting into P (Park), try to move the shift lever
out without first pushing the button on the shift lever.
If you can, the shift lever was not fully locked into
P (Park).
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts
too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it
is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into P (Park)” listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
Shifting Out of Park
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Shift lock release prevents shifting out of P (Park)
unless the vehicle is running or in Accessory mode
and the brake pedal is applied.
Parking Over Things That Burn
The shift lock release is always functional except
in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than
9-volt) battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-42 for
more information.
{ CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things
that can burn.
2-35
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
{ CAUTION:
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION:
2-36
(Continued)
(Continued)
• There are holes or openings in the
vehicle body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if
the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
after you move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-34.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing
a Trailer (Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling)
on page 4-31 or Towing a Trailer (Vehicles With
Heavy Duty Cooling) on page 4-32.
2-37
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with OnStar® controls; or it may have
OnStar and a compass display. See OnStar® System
on page 2-50 and/or Compass on page 2-38 for
more information.
The vehicle could have an Intellibeam™ inside rearview
mirror with OnStar controls. See “Intellibeam Intelligent
High-Beam Headlamp Control System” under Headlamps
on page 3-32 for more information.
For vehicles with OnStar®:
To turn on and start Intellibeam™, press the
Intellibeam™ button on the inside rearview mirror.
If the vehicle has the IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System, O can also be used to turn
off or reset this system. See “IntelliBeam™ Intelligent
High-Beam Headlamp Control System” under Headlamps
on page 3-32.
Cleaning the Mirror
O
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.
For vehicles without OnStar®:
Compass
AUTO/ ( (On/Off): Press and hold to turn the dimming
feature on or off.
Compass Operation
(On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on
or off.
Press
O to turn the compass on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the mirror displays the compass heading after a
few seconds.
2-38
Compass Calibration
If after few seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (for example, N for North), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic
item. If the letter C should ever appear in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads
a direction.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding O until a C is
shown in the compass display.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone
eight or drive out of the area, the compass variance
needs to be changed to the appropriate zone.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
O until a zone number displays.
Once the zone number displays, press O
2. Press and hold
3.
repeatedly until the correct zone number displays.
Stop pressing the button and the mirror returns to
normal operation. If C appears in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
See “Compass Calibration” listed previously.
2-39
Outside Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver’s door.
3. Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
4. Return the selector switch to the center position
when finished adjusting.
The preferred mirror positions can be stored with the
memory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel on page 2-77.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through car washes or confined spaces.
To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return
the mirror to its original position, push outward. Return
both mirrors to their original unfolded position before
driving.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch left or right to choose the
driver’s side or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
2-40
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
The driver’s side mirror adjusts for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled
by the on and off settings on the automatic dimming
inside rearview mirror. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror on page 2-38 for more information.
Park Tilt Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
This feature assists the driver by improving rear
obstacle detection and is useful in viewing the curb
when parallel parking.
{ CAUTION:
The passenger and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature
lets the driver view the curb when parallel parking.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted,
the mirror switch may be used. The mirror then
returns to this new position when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), and a
five-second delay has occurred, the mirror will return
to its original position. The delay prevents movement
of the mirror if multiple gear transitions R (Reverse)
to D (Drive) to R (Reverse) occur during a parallel
parking maneuver.
If the outside mirror selector switch is in the middle
position, neither outside mirror will move.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-44
for more information.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with this feature:
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual
Climate Control System on page 3-48 for more
information.
2-41
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
For vehicles with the URPA system, it operates at
speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h), and assists the driver
with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse).
The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect
the distance to an object up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind
the vehicle and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off
the ground.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
The display is located in
the dome lamp and can
be seen by looking over
your right shoulder.
{ CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are
too close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
CAUTION:
2-42
(Continued)
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly
illuminates to indicate the system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the red
light on the rear display will flash.
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level. Objects
must also be within 5 feet (1.5 m) from the rear bumper.
This distance may be less during warmer or humid
weather.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
Description
English
Metric
amber light
5 ft
1.5 m
amber/amber lights
40 in
1.0 m
amber/amber/red
lights/continuous beep
20 in
0.5 m
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and
continuous beep
1 ft
0.3 m
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur when the vehicle is closer
than 20 inches (0.5 m) from the object.
2-43
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition a red light will be shown on the rear URPA
display when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse).
This occurs under the following conditions:
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep your
rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-118.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-118.
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the trunk during the
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in the
rear display. Once the attached object is removed,
URPA will return to normal operation.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-44
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
For vehicles with the SBZA system. Read this entire
section before using the system.
The SBZA system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak
(0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3m
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV
interference caused by unauthorized modifications to
this equipment. Such modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
{ CAUTION:
SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not
replace driver vision. SBZA does not detect:
• Vehicles outside the side blind zones which
may be rapidly approaching.
• Pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Failure to use proper care when changing lanes
may result in damage to the vehicle, injury, or
death. Always check the outside and rearview
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the
turn signal before changing lanes.
The SBZA system is an aid that may help you avoid
lane change crashes with vehicles in the side blind spots
(zones). When the system detects a vehicle in the side
blind zone, amber SBZA displays will light up in the side
mirrors. This indicates that it may be unsafe to change
lanes. Before making a lane change, always check the
SBZA display, the outside and rearview mirrors, look
over your shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and use
the turn signal.
SBZA Detection Zones
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one
lane over from both sides of the vehicle, 11 ft. or 3.5 m.
This zone starts at each side mirror and goes back
approximately 16 ft. (5.0 m). The height of the zone is
approximately between 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) and 6 ft. (2.0 m)
off the ground.
The SBZA detection zones do not change if the vehicle
is towing a trailer. So be extra careful when changing
lanes while towing a trailer.
2-45
How the System Works
SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle is
approaching or passing other vehicles.
I
(SBZA): To turn SBZA on or off, press the CONFIG
hard key located on the navigation radio, then press I .
See “Configure Menu” in the index of the Navigation
System manual. The symbol will be highlighted when
the feature is active. If SBZA is disabled by the driver,
the SBZA mirror displays will not light up.
Left Side Mirror Display
Right Side Mirror
Display
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror
displays will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. When the vehicle is moving forward, the left or
right side mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is
detected in that blind zone. When the turn signal is used
and a vehicle has been detected on the same side, the
SBZA display will flash to give you extra warning not to
change lanes.
2-46
When the System Does Not Seem To Work
Properly
Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal
circumstances and will increase in wet conditions.
The system does not need to be serviced due to
an occasional missed alert. The number of missed
alerts will increase with increased rainfall or road spray.
If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system
is on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system may
need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects; however,
the system may occasionally light up due to guard rails,
signs, trees, shrubs, and other stationary objects. This
is normal system operation, the vehicle does not need
service.
SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners
of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions,
see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-118. If the
DIC still displays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE message after cleaning the bumper,
see your dealer/retailer.
The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is attached
to the vehicle, or a bicycle or object is extending out
to either side of the vehicle.
When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the
driver turning it off, the driver will not be able to turn SBZA
back on using the DIC. The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
ON option will not be selectable if the conditions for
normal system operation are not met. Until normal
operating conditions for SBZA are met, you should
not rely upon SBZA while driving.
SBZA Error Messages
The following messages may appear in the DIC:
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF: This
message indicates that the system has been turned off.
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE: This
message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled
because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in the blind zone. The sensor may be blocked
by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or even heavy rainstorms.
This message may also activate during heavy rain or
due to road spray. The vehicle does not need service.
For cleaning, see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-118.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: If this
message appears, both SBZA displays will remain
on indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system.
If these displays remain on after continued driving,
the system needs service. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-47
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
If the vehicle has the LDW system. Read this entire
section before using the system.
(Continued)
LDW will indicate the system is working whenever
it detects either the left or right lane marking. So if
you depart on the side of the lane that LDW is not
detecting, LDW will not warn you.
{ CAUTION:
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system does
not steer the vehicle and is only an aid to help you
stay in your driving lane. The LDW system may not:
• Provide you with enough time to avoid a lane
change collision.
• Be loud enough for you to hear the warning
beeps.
• Work properly under bad weather conditions or
if the windshield is not kept clean.
• Detect lane markings and will not detect road
edges.
• Warn you that your vehicle is crossing a lane
marking if the system does not detect the lane
marking.
CAUTION:
2-48
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you do not carefully maintain your vehicle position
within the lane, vehicle damage, injury, or death
could occur. Even with LDW, always keep your
attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle
position within the lane. Always keep the windshield
clean and do not use LDW in bad weather
conditions.
When the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking, the
LDW symbol will flash and you will hear three beeps.
LDW will not warn you if the turn signal is on or if
the vehicle makes a sharp maneuver. Before making
a lane change, check the vehicle’s mirrors, glance over
your shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and turn on
the turn signal before changing lanes.
How the System Works
LDW uses a camera located between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield to detect the
lane markings.
@
(Lane Departure Warning): To turn LDW on or off,
press the CONFIG hard key located on the navigation
radio, then press @ . See “Configure Menu” in the index
of the Navigation System manual. The symbol will be
highlighted when the feature is active.
LDW only operates at speeds of 35 mph (56 km) or
greater. If LDW is turned on when traveling at these
speeds, the LDW symbol will appear green if the system
detects a left or right lane marking. This symbol will
change to amber and flash and three beeps will sound
if you cross a detected lane marking without using the
turn signal.
LDW is not currently operating and will not warn you if
the LDW symbol does not appear.
When the System Does Not Seem To Work
Properly
The LDW symbol will not appear when the system is
having difficulty seeing the lines on the road or if the view
of the camera on the windshield is blocked with mud, dirt,
snow, ice, or slush, if the windshield is damaged, or when
weather limits visibility, such as while driving in fog, rain,
or snow conditions. This is normal operation, the vehicle
does not need service. For cleaning instructions, see
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-118.
When the vehicle is started, the LDW symbol that is
located in the instrument panel cluster will briefly come
on to indicate that the light is operational.
LDW warnings may occasionally occur due to tar marks,
shadows, cracks in the road, or other road imperfections.
This is normal system operation, the vehicle does not
need service.
2-49
LDW Error Message
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM: This
message may appear in the DIC to indicate that LDW is
not working properly. If this message remains on after
continued driving, the system needs service. Take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-79 for more information.
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE: This
message may appear in the DIC if LDW does not
activate due to a temporary condition. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for more
information.
OnStar® System
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
2-50
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route,
is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button
to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber glove
box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly
or annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan
is not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked
to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or
speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
2-51
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
How OnStar Service Works
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few simple
voice commands to browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information.
This feature is only available in the continental U.S.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-131
for more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-52
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Universal Home Remote
System
Your Responsibility
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-53
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
The vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,
for future programming. Only the original remote
control transmitter is needed for Fixed Code
programming. The programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”
later in this section.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate
that is being programmed.
2-54
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
to learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this button.
After pressing this button, complete the following
steps in less than 30 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be used
to control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 20 seconds.
2-55
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
To program up to three devices:
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as
an additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosing
a different function button in Step 3 than what was
used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
2-56
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a
Fixed Code unit, remove the battery cover
on the hand held transmitter supplied by the
manufacturer of the garage door opener motor.
If there are a row of dip switches similar to the
graphic above, the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit. If you do not see a row of dip switches,
return to the previous section for Programming
Universal Home Remote – Rolling Code.
The hand held transmitter can have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can
be used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the
motor head and hand held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are different, use the dip
switch settings on the motor head unit to program the
Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch
settings can also be used when the original hand
held transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled
as “Up,” “+,” or “On.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-57
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 will
now become the button strokes to be entered into
the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in
order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-58
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 55 seconds.
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.
2-59
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Sunroof
If the vehicle has a power
sunroof, the switches are
located on the overhead
console.
Cupholders
The vehicle has two cupholders in the center
console area.
Center Console Storage
The vehicle has a center console storage area located
between the front seats. It includes storage areas, and
accessory power outlet(s) on the rear of the console.
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net should
not be used to store heavy loads.
2-60
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be on
or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-27.
Express Open: The express open feature will operate
from the closed or partially open position. To express
open the power sunroof, fully press the driver’s side
switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a
desired position other than to the express-open position,
press the switch again, in either direction, to stop the
movement. If the sunshade is in the closed position,
it will open with the sunroof, or it can be opened
manually.
Vent Open: To open the power sunroof to the vent
position from the closed position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch forward. The rear of
the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the full vent position.
The sunshade must be opened manually.
Express Close: The express close feature will operate
from the open or partially open position. To express close
the power sunroof, fully press the driver’s side switch
forward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a desired
position other than closed, press the switch again in
either direction. The sunshade must be closed manually.
Close: To close the power sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
• From the open position, press and hold the driver’s
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must be
closed manually.
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.
Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the sunroof
while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point
of the obstruction. The sunroof will then return to the
full-open or vent position. To close the sunroof once
it has re-opened, refer to the two options previously
described under the “Close” feature instructions.
Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time
while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in the
tracks and possibly damage the sunroof operation or
plug the water draining system.
Vehicle Personalization
The vehicle has personalization that allows you to
program certain features to a preferred setting for up to
two drivers. The back of the keyless access transmitters
are labelled 1 or 2. Additional keyless access transmitters
programmed to the vehicle, as 3 and/or 4, do not have
a number on the back and are not capable of being
personalized. The number of programmable features
varies depending upon which vehicle options are
purchased.
On all vehicles, features such as climate control settings,
radio and XM™ preset settings, exterior lighting at unlock
and remote lock unlock confirmation, and language have
already been programmed. Your vehicle also has an
automatic door locking feature that is always on. You
cannot turn the automatic door locking feature off. See
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-14.
Some vehicles have additional features that can be
programmed including the seat, steering column, and
outside rearview mirror position.
If your vehicle has the base audio system, the following
information explains the vehicle personalization on your
vehicle.
2-61
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see
“Personalization” in the Index of the Navigation System
manual for information on vehicle personalization.
If your vehicle has the ability to program additional
personalization features, the driver’s preferences
are recalled by pressing any button on the keyless
access transmitter, 1 or 2, by selecting Driver 1 or 2 on
the radio display, or when a valid keyless access
transmitter is detected upon opening the driver’s door.
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is
detected upon opening the driver’s door, the driver
preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
Certain features can be programmed not to recall until
the ignition is turned off.
The default settings were preset but may have been
changed.
To change feature preferences, use the following
procedure.
Entering the Personal Settings Menu
To enter the feature programming mode:
1. The ignition must be either on, in ACCESSORY,
or in RAP and the transmission in P (Park) or
the vehicle speed less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2-62
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless access
transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the power/
volume knob.
4. Press the CNFG radio button or the tune/select
knob located on the right side of the radio to
enter the radio’s main menu.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SETUP menu.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to PERSONAL
SETTINGS MENU, then press the tune/select knob
to turn the feature on. A check mark appears
after this selection when it is turned on and the
entire list of personalization features will appear.
8. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to the feature
you want to change, then press the tune/select
knob to turn the feature on or off. If the feature
is turned on, a check mark will appear next to
the feature name.
Some features have submenus that show additional
features that can be turned on or off. After entering a
submenu, turn the tune/select knob and scroll to the
feature you want to change, then press the tune/
select knob to turn the feature on or off.
Personal Settings Menu Items
The PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU must be selected
with a check mark to program the personalization
features. If it is not selected, press the tune/select knob
until the check mark appears. If it is selected, the entire
list of features will be available to program.
DRIVER GREETING
This feature allows you to type in a customized name or
greeting that will appear on the display whenever the
corresponding keyless access transmitter, 1 or 2, is used
or Driver 1 or Driver 2 is selected on the radio display.
If a customized name or greeting is not programmed,
the system will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to correspond
with the numbers on the back of the keyless access
transmitters. In this case, the customized driver greeting
feature is factory shipped as off.
To turn the driver greeting feature on and to program a
customized name or greeting:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the DRIVER
GREETING feature.
You will see a cursor on the screen.
4. Turn the tune/select knob until you reach the
first letter you want; the letter will be highlighted.
There is a complete alphabet with both upper and
lower case letters and the numbers zero through
nine. Also included are spaces and other non-letter
characters such as the ampersand (&).
5. Press the tune/select knob once to select the letter.
The letter will then appear on the display and the
cursor will advance to the next letter.
If you make a mistake, press the F5 button, located
on the radio, repeatedly to cycle back through all of
the characters until you reach the character you wish
to change. Then turn the tune/select knob until the
letter you want is highlighted and press the tune/
select knob to select the new letter.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the name or greeting
you want is complete. You can program up to
16 characters.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER GREETING
is highlighted.
2-63
The name or greeting you programmed is now set.
You can either exit the programming mode by following
the instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle by pressing the
F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio, to return to
the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU. You will now see
a check mark next to the driver greeting menu item,
which means that the driver greeting feature is on
and a customized driver greeting is being used.
KEY FOB REMINDER
To turn off the customized driver greeting, and go back
to displaying either Driver 1 or Driver 2:
Mode 2: OFF
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER GREETING
is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the DRIVER
GREETING feature. The check mark will be cleared
and the customized driver greeting is off.
To change a customized driver greeting after exiting
the screen to spell the name, turn the driver greeting
feature off, and then back on.
2-64
This feature sounds the horn three times when the
driver’s door is closed and there is a keyless access
transmitter left inside of the vehicle. This will only occur
when the vehicle is off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEY FOB
REMINDER is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
REMOTE START
With remote start you can choose which features are
activated when the vehicle is started remotely. These
features include the climate control system, the rear
defogger, and the seat temperature, if your vehicle has
this feature. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-11
for more information.
Mode 1: ON (default)
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE START is
highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
CLIMATE CONTROL: The climate control system will
engage when the vehicle is started using the remote start
feature. It will be at the same climate control setting that
was last used by the driver using that keyless entry
transmitter.
REAR WINDOW DEFOG: If this feature is active, the
rear defogger will engage when the vehicle is started
using the remote start feature.
SEAT TEMP (Temperature) CONTROL: If your vehicle
has this feature and this feature is active, the seats
will be heated or cooled when the vehicle is started
using the remote start feature.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle by pressing the F6 (BACK) button,
located on the radio, to return to the PERSONAL
SETTINGS MENU.
When REMOTE START is on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name. You can then choose
to activate any or all of the following features by turning
the tune/select knob to highlight the feature, then
pressing the knob to turn it on.
2-65
REMOTE RECALL MEMORY
START BUTTON RECALL
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat position and
mirror position when the unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter is pressed.
Programmable Modes
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat, mirror, and
steering column position when the start button on the
ignition is pressed.
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
The exception to the default is the recall seat to driver
position which is on.
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE RECALL
MEMORY is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
If this feature is selected, START BUTTON RECALL
cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the
programming mode by following the instructions later in
this section or program the next feature available on your
vehicle.
2-66
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until START BUTTON
RECALL is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
If this feature is selected, REMOTE RECALL MEMORY
cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
AUTO EXIT SEAT
AUTO EXIT COLUMN
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the vehicle is off, the shift lever
is in P (Park), and the driver’s door is opened.
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the steering column when the vehicle is off, the shift
lever is in P (Park), and the driver’s door is opened.
Programmable Modes
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXIT SEAT is
highlighted.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXIT
COLUMN is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-67
LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash when
the keyless access transmitter is used to unlock
the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature
to work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking
lamps or headlamps are on.
If LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is turned on and either
KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK is turned on, the exterior lamps will flash when
the doors are passively unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT
(Front) DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK” later in this section for more information.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2-68
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once
when the keyless access transmitter is used to lock
the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature
to work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps
or headlamps are on.
If LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is turned on and either
KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK is turned on, the exterior lamps will flash when
the doors are passively unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT
(Front) DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK” later in this section for more information.
Programmable Modes
EXT. (Exterior) LIGHTS AT UNLOCK
Mode 1: ON (default)
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds unless
a door is opened, the ignition is in ACCESSORY, on, or
START, or the keyless access transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle.
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
You can select this feature by itself, or you can combine
it with Horn Chirps At Lock so that both the exterior lamps
flash and the horn chirps when you lock your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until EXT. LIGHTS AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-69
HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK
TWILIGHT DELAY
This feature sounds the horn once when the keyless
access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All doors
must be closed for this feature to work.
This feature allows you to set the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit
the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 1: 0:00 seconds (off)
Mode 2: OFF (default)
Mode 2: 0:05 seconds (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
Mode 3: 0:15 seconds
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until HORN CHIRPS AT
LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-70
Mode 4: 0:30 seconds
Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
Mode 7: 3:00 minutes
Mode 8: 4:00 minutes
To determine the mode to which the vehicle
is programmed or to program the vehicle to a
different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until TWILIGHT DELAY is
highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to scroll through the
available delay settings and set your selection.
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will not
illuminate when you exit the vehicle. Only one mode
can be selected at a time.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF
This feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
AT OFF is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between on
and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-71
DOORS UNLOCK AT OFF
DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK
This feature allows all of the doors to automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off.
The feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into P (Park).
Programmable Modes
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS UNLOCK
AT OFF is highlighted.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between on
and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-72
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK
KEYLESS FT (Front) DOOR UNLOCK
The feature allows all of the doors to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into P (Park).
This feature automatically unlocks the appropriate front
door when you approach the vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter and pull the respective door handle.
See Door Locks on page 2-13 for more information.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
Programmable Modes
Mode 2: OFF
Mode 1: ON
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS FT DOOR
UNLOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-73
KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK
LOCK DELAY
This feature automatically unlocks all of the doors
when you approach the vehicle with the keyless access
transmitter and pull either front door handle. See Door
Locks on page 2-13 for more information.
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors
for eight seconds after a power door lock switch or the
lock button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed.
The eight second delay occurs after the last door is
closed. If the keyless access transmitter is left inside
of the vehicle, the doors will not lock.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
Programmable Modes
Mode 2: OFF
Mode 1: ON (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-74
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LOCK DELAY is
highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
KEYLESS LOCK DELAY
Programmable Modes
This feature allows you to select whether the doors
automatically lock during normal vehicle exit. When
the ignition is turned off and all doors become closed,
the vehicle will determine how many keyless access
transmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If at least
one keyless access transmitter has been removed
from the interior of the vehicle, the doors will lock after
10 seconds.
Mode 1: ON
For example, if there are two keyless access
transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless access transmitter
locked in the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicle
or unlock the doors, if needed. A person approaching
the outside of the locked vehicle without an authorized
keyless access transmitter, however, will not be able
to open the door, even with a transmitter in the vehicle.
You may temporarily disable the passive door
locking feature by pressing the door unlock switch for
three seconds on an open door. Passive door locking will
then remain disabled until a door lock switch is pressed or
until the power mode transitions from the off power mode.
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS LOCK
DELAY is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-75
FRONT PASS (Passenger) WINDOW LOCK
CHIME VOLUME HIGH
This feature allows you to choose whether or not to
have the front passenger window deactivated as part
of the window lockout button. If you would like the front
passenger window to be deactivated when the window
lockout button is pushed, turn this feature on. If this
feature is left off, the window lockout button located
on the door will deactivate only the rear windows. See
Power Windows on page 2-19 for more information.
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the
vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime volume cannot
be turned off, only adjusted.
Programmable Modes
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until FRONT PASS
WINDOW LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-76
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: NORMAL (default)
Mode 2: HIGH
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until CHIME VOLUME
HIGH is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between the normal and high settings. A check mark
indicates that the chime volume is set to HIGH.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
SUSPENSION MODE
Exiting the Personal Settings Menu
If your vehicle has this feature, you can select between
performance or touring modes. Performance mode is
used where road conditions or personal preference
demand more control. Touring mode is used for normal
city and highway driving.
Once you have finished making your selections on the
base audio system, you will automatically return to
the main audio screen after 15 seconds. You can also
press the F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio,
to return to the main audio screen.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: PERFORMANCE
Mode 2: TOURING (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SUSPENSION
MODE is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SUSPENSION MODE submenu.
4. Turn the tune/select knob to highlight TOURING or
PERFORMANCE.
5. Press the tune/select knob to select the setting.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle by pressing the F6 (BACK) button,
located on the radio, to return to the PERSONAL
SETTINGS MENU.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel
If the vehicle has the memory feature, you can program
and recall memory settings for the following features
for up to two drivers:
• The driver’s seat position
• The outside rearview mirrors position
• The power tilt wheel and telescopic steering column
position
The following settings and presets are set automatically:
• The language, radio and XM™ presets, tone,
volume, playback mode (AM/FM or CD), last
displayed stations, and compact disc position
• The last climate control setting
• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position, if your
vehicle has this feature
• Other personalization settings, for example, remote
start settings
See Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61.
2-77
For vehicles with the base audio system, memory
features are programmed and recalled through the
radio from the DRIVER SELECTION and the DRIVER
EXIT SETTINGS submenus. See “Entering the Driver
Selection Submenu” and “Entering the Driver Exit
Settings Submenu” later in this section for more
information on recalling and programming the
memory settings using the base audio system.
For vehicles with the Navigation system, memory
features are programmed and recalled through the
navigation display. See “Personalization” in the Index
of the Navigation System manual for more information
on programming and recalling the memory settings using
the Navigation system.
For vehicles with the Navigation system, you can also
recall the memory features by using voice recognition,
if your vehicle has this feature. See “Voice Recognition”
in the Index of the Navigation System manual for
more information.
Entering the Driver Selection Submenu
To enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings:
1. The ignition must be either on, in ACCESSORY, or
in RAP and the transmission in P (Park) or the
vehicle speed less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless access
transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the power/
volume knob.
4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the main
menu of the radio.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SETUP menu.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to DRIVER
SELECTION.
8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the DRIVER
SELECTION submenu. The following items will
appear:
• DRIVER 1
• DRIVER 2
• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
2-78
Driver Selection Submenu Items
RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
DRIVER 1/DRIVER 2
To recall driver settings:
The numbers on the back of each keyless access
transmitter correspond to DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2.
If you would like to recall or store driver settings for
the driver that does not correspond to the number on
the back of the keyless access transmitter that you
are using:
1. Enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu.”
2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn the
tune/select knob to highlight the driver number that
you want, either DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.
3. Set your choice by pressing in the tune/select knob.
If you would like to recall or store driver settings for
the selected driver, see “RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS”
or “STORE DRIVER SETTINGS” later in this section.
If you would like to recall or store exit settings for
the selected driver, see “RECALL EXIT SETTINGS”
or “STORE EXIT SETTINGS” later in this section.
1. Enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu.”
2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn the
tune/select knob to scroll to RECALL DRIVER
SETTINGS and press in the knob.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), one beep will sound
and your previously saved driving position will then
be recalled.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), three beeps will
sound and your previously saved driving position
will not be recalled.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any
memory seat or mirror position button.
If you would like the stored driving positions to be
recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter or when starting your vehicle, see
“REMOTE RECALL MEMORY” or “START BUTTON
RECALL” under Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61.
2-79
STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
To store driver settings:
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the outside
rearview mirrors, and the steering column to a
comfortable driving position.
2. Enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu.”
3. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn
the tune/select knob to scroll to STORE DRIVER
SETTINGS and press in the knob. Two beeps
will sound to confirm that your driver settings
are saved.
4. Set the HUD position, if your vehicle has this
feature, the climate control temperature, fan
speed and mode settings, the radio presets, tone,
volume, playback mode (AM/FM, XM™, or CD),
and compact disc position.
Your memory settings are now programmed.
Any changes that are made to the HUD, audio
system, and climate controls while driving will be
automatically stored when the ignition is turned off.
5. Repeat the procedure for a second driver by
programming the other driver number.
2-80
Entering the Driver Exit Settings
Submenu
To enter the memory programming mode for your exit
settings:
1. The ignition must be either on, in ACCESSORY, or
in RAP and the transmission in P (Park) or the
vehicle speed less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless access
transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the power/
volume knob.
4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the main
menu of the radio.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SETUP menu.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to DRIVER
EXIT SETTINGS.
8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the DRIVER
EXIT SETTINGS submenu. The following items
will appear:
• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
• STORE EXIT SETTINGS
Driver Exit Settings Submenu Items
STORE EXIT SETTINGS
RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
To store exit settings:
To recall exit settings:
1. Enter the memory programming mode for your exit
settings by following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu.”
2. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu,
turn the tune/select knob to scroll to RECALL
EXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), one beep will sound
and your previously saved exit position will then be
recalled.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), three beeps will
sound and your previously saved exit position will
not be recalled.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any
memory seat or mirror position button.
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the outside
rearview mirrors, and the steering column to a
comfortable exit position.
2. Enter the memory programming mode for your exit
settings by following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu.”
3. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu,
turn the tune/select knob to scroll to STORE EXIT
SETTINGS and press in the knob. Two beeps will
sound to confirm that your new exit settings are
saved.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver by
programming the other driver number.
If you would like the stored exit positions to be recalled
when your vehicle is in P (Park), the vehicle is off, and
the driver’s door is opened, see “AUTO EXIT SEAT” and
“AUTO EXIT COLUMN” under Vehicle Personalization
on page 2-61.
2-81
✍ NOTES
2-82
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column .........................................3-6
Heated Steering Wheel ...................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System ................3-9
Flash-to-Pass ...............................................3-13
Windshield Wipers ........................................3-13
Rainsense™ II Wipers ...................................3-14
Windshield Washer .......................................3-15
Headlamp Washer ........................................3-16
Cruise Control ..............................................3-16
Adaptive Cruise Control .................................3-20
Headlamps ..................................................3-32
Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-36
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-36
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-36
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-38
Twilight Sentinel® ..........................................3-38
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-40
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-40
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-41
Parade Dimming ...........................................3-41
Reading Lamps ............................................3-41
Battery Load Management .............................3-41
Electric Power Management ...........................3-42
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .....................3-42
Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-43
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-46
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-47
Climate Controls ............................................3-48
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-48
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-52
Rear Climate Control System .........................3-53
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-54
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-55
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-56
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-57
Tachometer .................................................3-57
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-57
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-58
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-59
Charging System Light ..................................3-61
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-62
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-63
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-63
Lane Departure Warning Light ........................3-64
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light ...........................................3-64
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-65
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-65
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-66
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-69
Security Light ...............................................3-69
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-70
Lights On Reminder ......................................3-70
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-70
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-70
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-71
3-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-72
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-72
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-79
Other Messages ...........................................3-96
Audio System(s) .............................................3-97
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-98
Radio(s) ......................................................3-98
Using an MP3 ............................................3-111
XM Radio Messages ...................................3-114
Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-116
Bluetooth® .................................................3-116
Radio Personalization ..................................3-126
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-130
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-131
Radio Reception .........................................3-133
Backglass Antenna ......................................3-134
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-134
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-52.
B. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-40.
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-72.
Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-43 (If Equipped).
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
Headlamps on page 3-32. Cruise Control on
page 3-16. Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-20
(If Equipped). Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System
on page 3-9 (If Equipped).
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-56.
E. Windshield Wipers on page 3-13.
F. Audio System(s) on page 3-97. Navigation/Radio
System on page 3-116 (If Equipped).
G. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-131
(If Equipped). Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-20
(If Equipped). Heated Steering Wheel on page 3-7
(If Equipped).
H. Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column
on page 3-6.
I. Horn on page 3-6.
J. Ignition Positions on page 2-26.
K. Dual Climate Control System on page 3-48.
L. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
M. Cupholders on page 2-60.
N. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10.
O. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-30.
P. Glove Box on page 2-60.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the console, near the shift lever, to make the
front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This
warns others that you are having trouble. Press again to
turn the flashers off.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals do not work.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The power tilt and telescope wheel control is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Push the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up
or down.
3-6
Push the control forward or rearward to move the
steering wheel towards the front or rear of the vehicle.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
To set the memory position, see Vehicle Personalization
on page 2-61 and Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel on page 2-77.
Heated Steering Wheel
For vehicles with a heated steering wheel, the button for
this feature is located on the steering wheel.
(:
Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off.
A light on the button displays when the feature is
turned on.
The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start
heating.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G:
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
O:
Headlamps
3:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
#:
I:
Fog Lamps
Cruise Control
• Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped).
• Forward Collision Alert (FCA) (If Equipped).
• Flash-To-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-123.
Turn Signal On Chime
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it briefly until the lane
change is complete. The arrow will automatically
flash three times.
3-8
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km), a
warning chime will sound and the TURN SIGNAL ON
message will appear on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-79 for more information.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever
to change the headlamps from low to high beam.
Pull the lever back and then release it to change
from high to low beam.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System
If the vehicle has this system, read this entire section
before using it.
If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on, the
next time you start your vehicle the low beams will
be on.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
To re-activate high beams, pull lever toward you and
then push it forward again.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
This light on the instrument
panel cluster will be on,
indicating high-beam
usage.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-9
The Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) controls are
located on the end of
the multifunction lever.
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides an
audible and visual warning if you approach a vehicle
too rapidly. FCA also provides a visual warning with no
audible warning if you are following another vehicle much
too closely. FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar
to detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path, within a
distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates at speeds above
20 mph (32 km/h).
{ CAUTION:
FCA is only a warning system and does not apply
the brakes. When you are approaching a vehicle
or object too rapidly or when you are following a
vehicle too closely that is ahead of you, FCA may
not provide you with enough time to avoid a
collision. FCA is not designed to warn the driver
of pedestrians or animals. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you should
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
For more information, see Defensive Driving
on page 4-2.
3-10
9
R
(Off): Turns the system off.
(On): Turns the system on.
The Head-Up Display must be on and properly adjusted.
If the HUD is not on, FCA will not be enabled and you
will not be provided with FCA audible and visual
warnings. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-43
for more information.
Warning the Driver
{ CAUTION:
• On winding roads, FCA may not detect a
•
vehicle ahead. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA on winding
roads.
When weather limits visibility, such as in fog,
rain, or snow, FCA performance is limited.
There may not be enough warning distance to
the vehicle in front of you. Do not rely on FCA
in low visibility conditions.
The alert symbol will flash
on the HUD and a warning
beep will sound when driver
action may be required.
The driver warning is active when:
• You are approaching a vehicle too quickly.
• You are following a vehicle ahead much too closely.
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 for more
information.
{ CAUTION:
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch is on. If you press another Adaptive
Cruise Control button, you might go into cruise
when you do not want to. You could be startled
and even lose control. Be careful not to press
adaptive cruise buttons unless you want to use
cruise control.
3-11
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
The vehicle ahead symbol will only appear on the HUD
when a vehicle ahead of you is detected in your path.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
FCA will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead.
The symbol may disappear on curves, highway exit
ramps, or hills. Also, when another vehicle enters the
same lane as you, the FCA system will not detect the
vehicle until it is completely in your driving lane.
{ CAUTION:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked
by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a vehicle
ahead. FCA may not help you avoid a collision
under these conditions. Do not use FCA when the
radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your
radar clean. See “Cleaning the System” under
Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-20.
3-12
{ CAUTION:
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other objects
ahead of you. You could crash into an object ahead
of you. Do not rely on FCA when approaching
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other objects.
Unnecessary Warnings
FCA may occasionally provide an unnecessary warning
to guard rails, signs, and other stationary objects.
This is normal operation, your vehicle does not need
service.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEAN
RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICE
RADAR CRUISE. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-79.
Cleaning the System
Windshield Wipers
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean
the lens. See “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 3-20.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature allows you to use the high-beam
headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When this is done the following
will occur:
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as the lever is held there.
Release the lever to turn them off.
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they will
switch to low beam. To return to high-beam, push the
lever forward.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
Move the lever to one of the following positions:
7 (Mist): Move to mist for a single wiping cycle
and then release it. The lever will return to its original
position. Hold the lever in this position for continuous
wiping cycles.
9
(Off): Turns off the wipers.
&
(Delay): For a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the delay
adjustment band to set the length of the delay.
3-13
x
(Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer the band is moved toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must
be in delay for this feature to work.
6
1
(Low Speed): For slow, steady wiping cycles.
(High Speed): For rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-36 for
more information.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades before using
them. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, loosen or
thaw them. If they become damaged, install new blades.
For more information, see Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 5-52.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
For STS-V, the vehicle is equipped with a feature
that disables the wiper system when the hood is open
and the vehicle is stopped. Opening the hood will
automatically park the wipers if they are not parked.
3-14
Rainsense™ II Wipers
For vehicles with this feature, the moisture sensor is
mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate the
wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up
on the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear the
windshield depending on driving conditions and the
sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes will
occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more
frequently. The Rainsense wipers operate in a delay
mode as well as a continuous low or high speed as
needed. If the system is left on for long periods of time,
occasional wipes may occur without any moisture on
the windshield. This is normal and indicates that the
Rainsense system is activated.
To activate the Rainsense system, turn the wiper band
to delay mode and select one of the four sensitivity levels
indicated on the wiper stalk. The position closest to off is
the lowest sensitivity setting, level one. This allows more
rain or snow to collect on the windshield between wipes.
Turning the wiper band away from you to higher
sensitivity levels increases the sensitivity of the system
and frequency of wipes. The highest sensitivity setting,
level four, is closest to low. A single wipe occurs each
time the wiper stalk is turned to a higher sensitivity level
to indicate that the sensitivity level has been increased.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are
not affected by the Rainsense function. The Rainsense
system can be overridden at any time by manually
turning the wiper band to low or high speed.
When Rainsense is active, the headlamps turn on
automatically. The headlamps will turn off again once
the wipers turn off if it is light enough outside. If it
is dark, they will remain on. See Wiper Activated
Headlamps on page 3-36.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on
the exterior glass surface directly in front of
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause
the moisture sensor to malfunction.
Windshield Washer
The windshield washer button is located at the end
of the windshield wiper lever on the right side of
the steering column.
K (Washer Fluid): Press and hold to spray
windshield washer fluid on the windshield. The washer
will spray until the button is released. The wipers will
continue to clear the window for about six seconds after
the button is released and then stop or return to the
preset speed.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is
low, the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will
take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this
message to turn off. For information on the correct
washer fluid mixture to use, see Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 5-38 and Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13.
3-15
Headlamp Washer
Cruise Control
For vehicles with headlamp washers, they are located to
the inside of the headlamps.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
Press L located at the end of the windshield wiper
lever, to wash the headlamps and windshield. After the
first wash, the headlamps will be washed after the
fifth press of the windshield washer button.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the washer
fluid is low, the headlamp washers will not work.
See Windshield Washer on page 3-15 for additional
information.
3-16
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin or the
stability control system activates, the cruise control
automatically disengages. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-10 and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6
or Enhanced StabiliTrak® on page 4-6. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, the cruise
control can be turned back on.
These controls are located
on the end of the
multifunction lever.
Setting Cruise Control
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
9 (Off):
R (On):
Turns the system off.
Turns the system on.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use this position to make the
vehicle resume a previously set speed or accelerate
when cruise is already active.
T (Set/Decrease): Press to set the speed or to
decrease the speed when cruise is already active.
[
(Cancel): Press this button on the steering wheel to
cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press
T at the end of the lever and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on
while cruise control is on.
3-17
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is at the set speed desired and then
the brake is applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, move the cruise control switch
briefly from R to S .
The vehicle will go back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If the switch is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle
keeps going faster until the switch is released or the
brake is applied. Do not hold the switch at resume/
accelerate, unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press T at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from R to S . Hold it there
until the desired speed is reached, and then release
the switch. To increase the vehicle speed in very
small amounts, move the switch briefly to S .
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at end
of the lever to increase cruise set speed, the new
set speed must be at least 5 mph higher than current
speed for this method to work. If it is not 5 mph higher,
move the cruise switch to off, then on, and then reset
the speed using the set button.
3-18
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press T at the end of the lever until the lower
speed desired is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly
press T . Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed you
set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake to keep the
vehicle’s speed down. Applying the brake will turn off the
cruise control. If you need to apply the brake due to the
grade of the downhill slope, you might not want to attempt
to use the cruise control feature.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control.
• Step lightly on the brake pedal. This will end the
current cruise control session.
• Move the cruise control switch to 9 to turn off the
system completely.
• Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-19
Adaptive Cruise Control
If the vehicle has adaptive cruise control, read this
entire section before using this feature.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional
cruise control and is not a safety system. It allows
you to keep cruise control engaged in moderate traffic
conditions without having to constantly be reset.
3-20
Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a
vehicle directly ahead in your path, within a distance
of 328 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds above
30 mph (48 km/h). When it is engaged by the driver,
the system can apply limited braking or acceleration
of the vehicle, automatically, to maintain a selected
following distance to the vehicle ahead. The vehicle’s
braking during Adaptive Cruise Control is comparable
to a person applying moderate pressure to the vehicle’s
brake pedal. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control,
apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, your
vehicle will react like traditional cruise control.
{ CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard braking
or bring the vehicle to a complete stop. It will not
respond to stopped vehicles, pedestrians or
animals. When you are approaching a vehicle or
object, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving and you should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes. For more information,
see Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise Control
•
•
may not detect a vehicle ahead. You could
crash into a vehicle ahead of you. Do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control on winding roads.
Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a crash
when you are driving in conditions where
vehicles may suddenly slow or stop ahead of
you, enter your lane, or cross your vehicle’s
path. If you are driving in these conditions, do
not use Adaptive Cruise Control. The warning
beep and alert symbol may indicate that you
are driving in conditions where Adaptive Cruise
Control should not be used. See “Alerting the
Driver” in this section.
On slippery roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause needless wheel spinning, and you
could lose control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• When weather limits visibility, such as when in
fog, rain, or snow conditions, Adaptive Cruise
Control performance is limited. There may not
be enough distance to adapt to the changing
traffic conditions. Do not use cruise control
when visibility is low.
The cruise controls are
located on the end of the
multifunction lever.
(Continued)
3-21
The Adaptive Cruise controls are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
9
R
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With
the Set Button
(Off): Turns the system off.
(On): Turns the system on.
S (Resume/Increase): Use this position to make the
vehicle resume a previously set speed or increase the set
speed when Adaptive Cruise Control is already active.
T (Set/Decrease): Press to set the speed or to
decrease the set speed when Adaptive Cruise Control
is already active.
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control switch
on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not want
to. You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control switch off until
you want to use cruise control.
[
(Cancel): Press this button located on the steering
wheel to cancel adaptive cruise control.
{ CAUTION:
If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control without
your Head-up Display (HUD) properly adjusted,
your Adaptive Cruise Control settings may not be
visible. You could forget your settings and be
startled by Adaptive Cruise Control response and
even lose control. Keep your HUD on and properly
adjusted when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
3-22
This symbol appears
on the Head-Up Display
(HUD) to indicate that
Adaptive Cruise Control
is active. The number
indicates the set speed.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected in
your path.
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is on and
properly adjusted. You cannot engage Adaptive
Cruise Control unless the HUD is on. See Head-Up
Display (HUD) on page 3-43 for more information.
United States version
shown, Canada similar
2. Move the switch to on.
3. Get up to the desired speed.
4. Press T at the end of the lever and release the
button.
5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it might
immediately apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle
ahead that is too close or moving slower than your
vehicle.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-43 for more
information.
Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so you
know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if a vehicle
is not detected in your path. Keep in mind speed limits,
surrounding traffic speeds, and weather conditions when
adjusting your set speed.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when the
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10,
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 or Enhanced
StabiliTrak® on page 4-6. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, the Adaptive
Cruise Control can be turned back on.
3-23
Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive
Cruise Control
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
Press T at the end of the lever until the lower speed
desired is reached, then release the button.
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press T at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from
R to S . Hold it there until the desired set speed is
displayed in the HUD, then release the switch.
To increase the set speed in small amounts, move
the switch briefly to resume/increase. Each time this
is done, the vehicle set speed increases by about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the
system determines there is no vehicle in front of you.
At that point, your vehicle speed will increase to the
set speed.
3-24
To slow down in small amounts, briefly press T .
Each this is done, the set speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the brakes are applied while the Adaptive Cruise
Control is at a set speed, this disengages the Adaptive
Cruise Control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle reaches about 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more, move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch briefly
from R to S . Adaptive Cruise Control will be engaged
with the speed previously selected.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the following
distance (gap) selected.
Use the GAP button on
the steering wheel to
adjust the follow distance
between your vehicle
and other vehicle’s.
There are six follow distances to choose from.
The follow distance selection ranges from near to far
(one second to two seconds follow time). The distance
maintained for a selected follow distance varies based
on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed the further
back you will follow. Consider traffic and weather
conditions when selecting the follow distance. The range
of selectable distances may not be appropriate for all
drivers and driving conditions. If you prefer to travel at a
following distance farther than Adaptive Cruise Control
allows, disengage the system and drive manually.
A graphic on the HUD
indicates the selected
following distance.
This picture shows a
maximum follow distance.
Press the top of the button to increase the distance
or the bottom of the button to decrease the distance.
The first button press shows the current follow distance
setting on the HUD. The current following distance
setting is maintained until it is changed.
United States version
shown, Canada similar
The vehicles will move closer together as you select a
smaller following distance.
3-25
Alerting the Driver
The alert symbol flashes
on the HUD and a warning
beep sounds when driver
action is required.
{ CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited braking
ability to slow your vehicle. In some cases,
Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow
your vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Be ready
to take action and apply the brakes yourself.
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
Driver action is required when:
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a vehicle too
rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
The vehicle ahead symbol
only appears on the HUD
when a vehicle ahead
is detected in your path.
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-79 for more information.
• A malfunction is detected in the system. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for more
information.
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
3-26
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles you
may see ahead.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{ CAUTION:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked
by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a vehicle
ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when the
radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your
radar clean. See “Cleaning the System” later in
this section.
Adaptive Cruise Control automatically slows your vehicle
down when approaching a slower moving vehicle. It then
adjusts your speed to follow the vehicle in front at the
selected following distance. Your speed increases or
decreases to follow the vehicle in front of you but will
not exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking,
if necessary. When braking is active, your brake lights
come on. It may feel or sound different than if you were
applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.
{ CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. You could crash into
an object ahead of you. Do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control when approaching stationary
or slow-moving vehicles or other objects.
{ CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react
to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may accelerate
toward objects, such as a stopped vehicle that
suddenly appears after the lead vehicle changes
lanes. Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to take
action and apply the brakes.
3-27
Low-Speed Deactivation
If your speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control will
begin to disengage. The driver alert symbol on the HUD
will flash and the warning beep will sound. The driver
must take action since Adaptive Cruise Control will
not slow the vehicle to a stop.
Deactivation When Head-Up Display is
Turned Off
If the HUD is turned off when Adaptive Cruise Control
is engaged, it will begin to disengage. A warning beep
sounds and the message RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for additional
information. If Adaptive Cruise Control was braking when
the HUD is turned off, the braking will continue briefly.
3-28
Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive Cruise Control
Override
To increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the
accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes.
A PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message will
appear on the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on
page 3-43 for additional information. Once you pass
the vehicle and remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal, Adaptive Cruise Control returns to normal
operation and the brakes can be applied, if needed.
{ CAUTION:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes.
You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.
Do not rest your foot on the accelerator pedal
when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
Curves in the Road
{ CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in
your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of
you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra
attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes
if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while
driving in curves.
Adaptive Cruise Control might operate differently in a
sharp curve. It might reduce your speed if the curve is
too sharp.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, Adaptive
Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your
lane and your vehicle could accelerate. When this
happens, the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear
on the HUD.
3-29
Highway Exit Ramps
{ CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set speed
while entering or on highway exit ramps. You could
be startled by this acceleration and even lose
control of the vehicle. Disengage Adaptive Cruise
Control before entering a highway exit ramp. Do not
use Adaptive Cruise Control while entering or on
exit ramps.
Adaptive Cruise Control might detect a vehicle that is
not in your lane and apply the brakes.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
Adaptive Cruise Control might occasionally provide a
driver alert and/or braking that you consider unnecessary.
It could respond to signs, guardrails, and other stationary
objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle
until it is completely in the lane. Be ready to take
action and apply the brakes yourself.
3-30
Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hills
and When Towing a Trailer
Erasing Set Speed Memory
The set speed memory is erased when the Adaptive
Cruise Control switch or the ignition is turned off.
Other Messages
How well Adaptive Cruise Control works on hills and
while a trailer is being towed depends on your vehicle
speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness
of the hills. It might not detect a vehicle in your lane while
driving on hills. While going up steep hills, you might want
to use the accelerator pedal to maintain your vehicle
speed. While going downhill and towing a trailer, you
might want to brake to keep your vehicle speed down.
Applying the brake disengages the system. You may
choose not to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep
hills when towing a trailer.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
There are three messages that may appear on the DIC.
They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE, RADAR CRUISE
NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR. These messages will
appear to indicate a problem with the Adaptive Cruise
Control. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79
for more information.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If this happens, turn off the engine and clean the emblem/
lens, located in the center of the front outside grille.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in icy conditions,
or when visibility is low, such as in fog, rain or snow.
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a soft
cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, engage the
Adaptive Cruise Control. If you are unable to do so,
see your dealer/retailer.
Apply the brake pedal or move the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch to off, to disengage the system. Adaptive
Cruise Control information does not appear on the
HUD while the system is not engaged.
3-31
Headlamps
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the exterior lamps on and
off automatically depending upon how much light is
outside of the vehicle.
The automatic lights may be disabled even if the control
is in the AUTO position.
To enable automatic lighting do any of the following:
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the switch. It returns back to the
AUTO position by itself.
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever.
• Turn the headlamp control from the parking lamp
O (Exterior Lamp Control):
• Turn the headlamp control from the headlamp
Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
O
(Off): Turns off all lamps and automatic lighting
features, including Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and
IntelliBeam™.
This is a momentary switch that springs back to the
AUTO position when released. An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS
ON message appears on the DIC when automatic lights
are enabled or an AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message
appears on the DIC when the automatic lights are
disabled.
3-32
position to AUTO.
position to AUTO.
To disable automatic lighting do any of the following:
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the switch. It returns back to the
AUTO position by itself.
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the
parking lamp position.
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the
headlamp position.
Disabling automatic lighting disables the automatic
headlamp operation, DRL, and IntelliBeam™
High-Beams (if the vehicle has them).
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
5
(Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together
with the previously listed lamps and lights.
IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
For vehicles with IntelliBeam, read this entire section
before using this feature.
IntelliBeam is an enhancement to the vehicle’s
headlamp system. It uses a light sensor located on
the back of the rearview mirror to turn the high-beam
headlamps on and off depending on approaching traffic.
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam
AUTO 3 (IntelliBeam On/Off): Press and release
the IntelliBeam button on the inside rear view mirror.
The indicator on the mirror turns on. Once the system
has been turned on, it remains on each time the vehicle
is started. Additionally, the IntelliBeam system must be
enabled.
To enable the System, turn the exterior lamp control
to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction lever in its
starting position. The High-Beam On Light appears on
the instrument panel cluster when the high-beams are on.
See Highbeam On Light on page 3-70. The vehicle has
variable intensity high-beams. The high-beam indicator
on the instrument panel cluster comes on as soon as the
high-beams start to come on, and remains on until the
high-beams have completely turned off. Vehicles with
IntelliBeam quickly turn off the high-beams if the system
detects the sudden presence of vehicle lights ahead.
The IntelliBeam system turns the high-beam headlamps
on when it is dark enough, there is no other traffic
present, and the IntelliBeam system is enabled.
3-33
Driving with IntelliBeam
• The IntelliBeam system is turned off at the inside
IntelliBeam only activates the high-beams when driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h).
• The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the control
of IntelliBeam, until any of the following situations occur:
• The system detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps.
• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.
• The outside light is bright enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
• The high-beam headlamps are manually turned on
or you use the flash-to-pass feature. See Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9 and
Flash-to-Pass on page 3-13.
When either of these conditions occur, the IntelliBeam
feature is temporarily disabled until the high-beam
stalk is returned to its starting position. If either of
these conditions occur and IntelliBeam already has
the high-beam headlamps on, the feature is disabled
and the light in the mirror turns off.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
except AUTO.
When this occurs, IntelliBeam is disabled until the
control is turned back to the AUTO position and the
AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON message displays on
the DIC.
IntelliBeam may not turn off the high-beams if the
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because
of any of the following:
• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,
obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,
snow and/or road spray.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,
mist, or other airborne obstructions.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, or
obstructed by something that blocks the view of
the IntelliBeam light sensor.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,
haze, or other obstructions.
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of
the vehicle points upward, causing the IntelliBeam
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps
and taillamps.
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
You might need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
3-34
rearview mirror.
Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam at the
Rearview Mirror
IntelliBeam can be disabled and reset to the original
factory setting by using the controls on the inside
rearview mirror.
Cleaning the IntelliBeam Light Sensor
The light sensor is located
on the inside of the vehicle
at the back of the
rearview mirror.
AUTO 3 (IntelliBeam On/Off): To disable the
system, press this button on the inside rearview mirror.
The IntelliBeam indicator turns off and does not come
back on until the IntelliBeam button is pressed again.
When IntelliBeam has turned on the high-beams, pull or
push the high-beam stalk. This disables IntelliBeam and
the IntelliBeam indicator on the rearview mirror turns off.
To re-enable IntelliBeam, press the IntelliBeam button on
the mirror.
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding this
button for 20 seconds until the light flashes three times.
If you accidentally activate this, the vehicle’s setting
automatically resets each time the ignition is turned off
and then on again; otherwise, refer to the text above for
resetting the system.
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using glass
cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor window.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the surface of the
sensor window.
3-35
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for about
six seconds. For this feature to work, automatic lighting
must be enabled. See Headlamps on page 3-32 for
additional information.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also
turn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
See Lights On Reminder on page 3-70 for additional
information.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
3-36
The DRL system comes on when the following
conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
• The automatic lights are enabled.
• The transmission is not in P (Park).
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will
be on. No other exterior lamps will be on when the DRL
are being used. The instrument panel will not be lit.
When the automatic lights are enabled and it is dark
enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it is bright enough outside,
the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the DRL will turn
back on. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system comes on immediately.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage, it will take about
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as
usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness lever
is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 3-40.
To operate the vehicle with the DRL off, turn the
exterior lamp control off and then do one of the
following:
Light Sensor
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp
position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlamp
position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off and
back to AUTO.
An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message will appear
on the DIC, showing that automatic lighting has
been disabled. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-79.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
The light sensor for the DRL is located on top of the
instrument panel. If the sensor is covered, it will prevent it
from sensing light, and the exterior lamps may come on
when they are not needed.
3-37
Fog Lamps
Twilight Sentinel®
The fog lamp controls are located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
Twilight Sentinel® can turn the lamps on and off for you.
#
(Fog Lamps): The band with this symbol is used to
turn the fog lamps on and off.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps
to work.
To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog lamp band
on the lever up to the dot and release it. The band
will return to its original position.
If the high-beam headlamps are turned on, the fog
lamps will turn off. The fog lamps will come back
on when the high-beam headlamps are off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
Twilight Sentinel work, so be sure it is not covered.
3-38
With Twilight Sentinel the following will happen:
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps
that come on with headlamps will also come on.
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL)
will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch
is in the off position.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it will take about one minute
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL
if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument
panel cluster might not be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness control is in full bright
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-40
for more information.
Twilight Sentinel also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel has turned on
the lamps when you turn off the ignition, the lamps
will remain on until:
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to the
parking lamp position.
• A delay time that you select has elapsed.
See Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61 to select the
delay time needed. You can also select no delay time.
If the ignition is turned off with the exterior lamp switch
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off
as soon as the switch is turned off.
As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when
it is dark outside. First set the parking brake while the
ignition is in OFF/ACCESSORY. Then start the vehicle.
The lamps will stay off until the parking brake is released.
3-39
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Instrument Panel Brightness
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on,
the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned off. This protects against draining the
battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps
or parking lamps on. The battery saver does not work
if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition is
turned off.
Press the center knob on
the DIC control panel to
extend. Then turn the knob
clockwise to brighten the
lights or counterclockwise
to dim them. If the knob
is turned completely
clockwise, the interior
lamps turn on.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn
the lamps back on.
Base Level Shown,
Uplevel Similar
3-40
Entry Lighting
Reading Lamps
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control when a door is opened or if you press the remote
keyless entry transmitter unlock button. If activated by
the transmitter, the lighting will remain active for about
25 seconds. The entry lighting system uses the light
sensor; it must be dark outside in order for the lamps to
turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds after the
last door is closed. They will dim to off if the ignition is
on, or immediately deactivate if the power locks are
activated.
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
These lamps come on automatically when any door is
opened.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel
displays and backlighting during daylight hours when
the key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on.
This feature operates with the light sensor and is fully
automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness outside
and the parking lamps are active, the instrument panel
displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel
brightness knob. See Instrument Panel Brightness on
page 3-40 for additional information.
Battery Load Management
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine when
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During
times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle at a
higher revolutions per minute (rpm) setting than normal to
make sure the battery charges. High electrical loads may
occur when several of the following are on: headlamps,
high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, the
climate control fan at high speeds, heated seats and
engine cooling fans.
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical
loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer to clear
the glass and the fan may cut back to a lower speed.
For more battery saving information, see “Battery Saver
Active Message” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-79.
3-41
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or
down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert
will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,
rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and
loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
3-42
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or
Service Battery Charging System. If this message is
displayed, it is recommended that the driver reduce the
electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-79.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect the vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When the
ignition is turned off, the power to these features will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes
if a new car has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will
be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door
is opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp
switch is turned on.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{ CAUTION:
• Check Gages Icon
• Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators
(If Equipped), see Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 3-20
• Forward Collision Alert Features and Indicators
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in your
field of view, it may take you more time to see
things you need to see when it is dark outside.
Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed
low in your field of view.
(If Equipped), see Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 3-9
• Radio Features
For vehicles with the Head-Up Display (HUD), some of
the driver information that appears on the instrument
panel cluster is projected onto an image on the
windshield.
The information can be displayed in English or metric
units. To change from English to metric units, see
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-72.
The HUD consists of the following information:
•
•
•
•
Speedometer
Turn Signal Indicators
High-Beam Indicator Symbol
United States version
shown, Canada similar
Always scan the instrument panel displays, controls and
driving environment just as you would in a vehicle without
HUD, so important warning lights are not missed. Under
important warning conditions, the CHECK GAGES
message will display in the HUD. View the Driver
Information Center (DIC) for more information.
Driver Shift Control Transmission Feature, see
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-30
3-43
Brightness Control: Press the knob on the center of
the DIC control panel to extend and then pull the knob
until is completely extended. Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the brightness
of the HUD display.
To adjust the HUD so it can be seen properly:
1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position,
before adjusting the HUD position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Adjust the position and brightness of the HUD
display.
The HUD controls are located to the left of the steering
wheel on the DIC control panel.
Off: Turn the brightness control knob fully
counterclockwise to turn the HUD display off.
~
(Head-Up Display): Press to move the HUD
display up or down on the windshield. HUD cannot be
adjusted side-to-side.
The brightness of the HUD display is determined by the
light conditions in the direction the vehicle is facing and
where the HUD has been positioned on the windshield.
If the vehicle is facing a dark object or a heavily shaded
area, the HUD may begin to dim because it anticipates
the vehicle entering a dark area.
When sunlight enters the HUD it can make it difficult
to see the display. The display will return to normal
brightness when the sunlight no longer enters the HUD.
Wearing polarized sunglasses could also make the
HUD display harder to see.
3-44
The Ignition is On and the HUD Image
Cannot Be Seen
Check to see if:
•
•
•
•
The HUD unit is covered.
The brightness is adjusted properly.
The HUD display is adjusted to the proper height.
Ambient light in the direction the vehicle is facing
is low.
• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-123.
The windshield is part of the HUD system.
See Windshield Replacement on page 5-52.
The following messages may appear in the HUD:
SPEED ALERT
When the Speed Advisor feature is turned on,
HUD displays either the posted or advisory speed as
determined by the information on the map disc in
the navigation system. To turn the Speed Advisor on or
off, see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-72.
The Speed Advisor can be set to show a speed alert
when the vehicle speed exceeds the speed alert limit
as set in the DIC menu. Depending on the level of
the HUD on the vehicle, your HUD may work like either
of the following:
• The HUD speedometer will turn red when the
vehicle speed exceeds the speed alert limit.
When the vehicle speed is at or below the alert limit
and above the posted speed or advisory speed,
the speedometer turns yellow. If the Speed
Alert setting in the DIC is set to AT LIMIT, the
speedometer will not turn yellow. When the vehicle
speed is at or below the posted speed or advisory
speed, the speedometer remains green.
• The HUD speedometer will turn yellow when the
vehicle speed exceeds the speed alert limit.
When the vehicle speed is at or below the alert
limit, the speedometer remains green.
Posted Speed
Advisory Speed
3-45
PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
When the PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message
displays, the accelerator pedal is being pressed and
the Adaptive Cruise Control is overridden and cannot
automatically apply the brakes. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the Adaptive Cruise Control will return
to normal operation and be able to apply the brakes,
if needed.
Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical
equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
An Adaptive Cruise Control active symbol, alert symbol
or vehicle ahead symbol may also appear. See Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 3-20 for more information.
Care of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD display.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry.
Notice: When cleaning, be careful not to scratch
the HUD or camera lenses. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the HUD lens because the cleaner
could leak inside the unit and cause damage.
3-46
The vehicle has one outlet in front of the center console,
one in the center console lid and there may be an
additional outlet in the rear of the center console.
The vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet.
Be sure to cover the outlet with the protective cap
when it is not in use.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
use equipment exceeding maximum amperage
rating of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding electrical equipment.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from
the plug because the power outlets are designed
for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
Ashtray
For vehicles with an ashtray, it is located under the
climate control panel on the center console. Press on the
door to release the ashtray. The ashtray automatically
slides open for use.
To empty the ashtray with the ashtray in full open
position, locate the release button to the right of the ash
receiver and slide it to the right (in the direction of the
arrow). The ash receiver will unlock and lift slightly and
can then be easily removed from the housing. To replace
the ash receiver, place it into position in the ashtray
housing and push down firmly until it locks into place.
Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 15 amperes.
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.
The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for
the rear seat passengers.
To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the heating
element and let go. When the lighter is ready it will
pop back out by itself.
3-47
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled
for the vehicle with this system.
Automatic Operation
Vehicles With Heated and Ventilated Seats Shown,
Vehicles Without Similar
A. Driver and Passenger
Side Power Buttons
B. Ventilated Seat
C. AUTO
D. Recirculation
E. Air Conditioning
3-48
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Heated Seat
Fan Control
Defrost
Rear Window Defogger
Air Delivery Mode
Control
AUTO (Automatic): The system automatically
controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning
and recirculation modes in order to heat or cool the
vehicle to the desired temperature.
To place the system in automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting,
generally, between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool
any faster. If the system is set at the warmest
temperature setting, the system will try to
continuously heat the vehicle and will not adjust
the system down as the vehicle warms up.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
system delays turning on the fan until warm air
is available. The system starts out blowing air
at the floor, but can automatically change modes
as the vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen
temperature setting. The length of time needed for
warm up depends on the outside temperature and
the length of time that has elapsed since the vehicle
was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
The display can be changed from English to metric units
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-72.
Manual Operation
O (Driver’s Temperature Control):
Press to turn the
entire climate control system on or off. Turn the knob to
increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
O (Passenger’s Temperature Control):
Press to turn
the passenger climate control system on. Turn the knob
to increase or decrease the temperature for the front
passenger only. The passenger side power button does
not turn off the climate control system. The system is set
to the same setting as the driver.
y A z (Fan Control):
Press to increase or decrease
the fan speed. This cancels automatic operation and
lets the amount of airflow be adjusted manually.
Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information,
see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-54
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
y N z (Air Delivery Mode): Press to change the
direction of the airflow in the vehicle. This cancels
automatic operation and lets the air delivery mode be
adjusted manually. Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation.
The outboard air outlets always receive airflow
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet Adjustment
on page 3-52 to change this airflow from the outboard
outlets.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets. In automatic operation,
cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air
to the floor outlets.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the windshield and side windows.
3-49
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog
or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and floor
outlets, with some air directed to the side windows and
outboard panel outlets. When this mode is selected,
the system turns off recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. If recirculation
is selected while in the defog mode, it is cancelled
after 10 minutes.
If there is fogging on the side windows, remain in defog or
defrost mode until they clear.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog
or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield,
with some air directed to the side windows and outboard
panel outlets. The air-conditioning compressor runs
automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode.
This mode can also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
3-50
^ (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
conditioning off. Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation. To limit fogging on the windshield, the
air conditioning compressor cannot be off while in
the defrost mode.
h (Recirculation): Press once to select recirculation
mode or twice to select outside air. If in AUTO mode,
press h once to select recirculation. This mode
recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside
the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air
and odors from entering the vehicle.
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and
shuts off when defog mode is selected. Both of these
features are designed to limit fogging in the vehicle.
If recirculation is selected during defog mode,
it automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Using the recirculation for long periods of time might
cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry or
stuffy. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
the vehicle has cooled, press the recirculation button
again to select outside air or press the AUTO button.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The defogger only works when the ignition is on or
during remote start, if programmed. See “Personal
Settings Menu” under Vehicle Personalization on
page 2-61 for additional information.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. The rear window defogger
stays on for 10 minutes, before turning off.
If the vehicle’s speed is above 30 mph (48 km/h), the
rear defogger stays on continuously. If turned on again,
the defogger only runs for about five minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by
turning off the engine.
The heated outside rearview mirrors also heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when
the rear window defogger is on. See Outside Heated
Mirrors on page 2-41.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything
to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
{
(Ventilated Seat): If the vehicle has this feature,
press to turn the driver or passenger side ventilated seat
on. See Heated and Ventilated Seats on page 1-3.
J (Heated Seat): If the vehicle has this feature, press
to turn the driver or passenger side heated seat and
seatback on. See Heated and Ventilated Seats on
page 1-3.
3-51
Sensors
Outlet Adjustment
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow, either side-to-side or
up and down. Use the thumbwheels to open or close
the outlets to adjust the airflow.
Turn the thumbwheel towards the vehicle door to open
the outlets and allow the maximum amount of air to
enter your vehicle. Turn the thumbwheel towards
the center console to close the outlets and minimize
the amount of air entering the vehicle.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
The solar sensor located on the instrument panel, near
the windshield, monitors the solar heat.
The interior temperature sensor located on the
instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel,
measures the temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
The climate control system uses the information
from these sensors to adjust the temperature, the fan
speed and the air delivery, in order to maintain the
selected temperature. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
Do not cover the sensors or the automatic climate
control system will not work properly.
3-52
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment air
filter may need to be replaced. For more information,
see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-54.
Rear Climate Control System
The vehicle has a rear climate control system. The base
model includes air outlets in the rear of the center console
for cooling and under-seat air outlets for heating. The
temperature, amount of airflow, and the air delivery mode
is controlled automatically by the front climate control
system.
Some vehicles may have an optional climate control
panel for the rear passenger, located on the back of the
center console.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn to change the
direction of the airflow for the rear seat passengers.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Y
(Vent): Air is directed to the console outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the console and the
floor outlets.
[
(Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets.
The front climate control system automatically controls
the amount of airflow to the rear seat passengers,
regardless of optional equipment. Airflow to the rear
system turns off when defrost is selected on the front
climate control panel, in order to direct air to clear the
windshield.
z
A. Temperature Control
B. Air Delivery Mode
Control
9 (Off):
C. Heated Seat
D. Heated Seat
Indicator
Turns off the airflow to the rear seat
passengers. With the air delivery off there may be an
increase in the air rush sound of the front system.
(Heated Seat): Press to turn on rear heated seats.
There are two buttons, each with three indicator lights,
located between the climate control knobs on the rear
climate control panel.
Keep the area under the front seats clear of any objects
so the air in the vehicle can circulate effectively.
3-53
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger
compartment air filter. There are two types of filters
available. There is a standard dust filter that traps small
particles including pollen. There is, also, a dust/odor filter
available that traps dust and pollen and uses a charcoal
element to help reduce many offensive odors from
entering your vehicle. The filter will need to be changed
periodically. For information on when to change the
passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
Notice: Driving without a passenger compartment
air filter in place can cause water and small particles,
like paper and leaves, to be pulled into your climate
control system which may cause damage to it. Make
sure you always replace the old filter with a new one.
The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood near the windshield, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4 for
information on doing your own service work.
To access the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Pull back the rubber hood seal from the edge of the
leaf screen vent cover.
2. Remove the three fasteners that hold the filter
cover in place and slide the cover off.
3. To access the filter, remove the water deflector by
lifting the outboard edge of the deflector to release
the retention tab.
3-54
4. Lift the inboard edge of the deflector to release the
retention tab.
5. Lift and slide the water deflector toward the inboard
side and remove it.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
6. The top edge of the filter should be visible. Reach
in and lift the filter out, pulling upward and toward
the front of the vehicle.
7. Insert the new air filter by sliding it back into place.
Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward
the passenger compartment.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
Reverse steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the water
deflector, filter cover and the hood seal.
3-55
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
how much fuel is being used and many of the other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States Base version shown, Canada and Uplevel similar
3-56
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
See “MPH (km)” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-72 for more information.
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. The vehicle’s odometer works together
with the driver information center. The odometer can
be set for a Trip A and a Trip B. See “Trip Information”
under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-72 for
more information.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind the driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The driver safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds,
then flashes for
several more.
If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total
of the old odometer.
Tachometer
This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
3-57
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started,
a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-59 for more
information. The passenger safety belt light, located
on the instrument panel, comes on and stays on for
several seconds and then flashes for several more.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-51.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
3-58
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have
it fixed immediately.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79
for more information.
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if your vehicle has this feature, you may not see
the system check.
3-59
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{ CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right front
passenger’s seat, it means that the passenger
sensing system has not turned off the passenger’s
frontal airbag. A child in a rear-facing child restraint
can be seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
3-60
{ CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the
airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-59
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Charging System Light
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel
cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in
the right front passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-58 for more on this, including
important safety information.
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for more
information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
3-61
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
will stay on if the parking brake does not release fully. If it
stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means
there is a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push, or
the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer
to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
{ CAUTION:
United States
Canada
This light comes on briefly when the engine is turned
on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn if there is a problem.
3-62
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-62.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for
all brake related DIC messages.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
The TCS warning light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the Traction Control System (TCS) warning light
comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with
the TCS.
The light also comes on if the TCS is turned off using
the traction control on/off button located on the console.
If this light stays on or comes on while driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Turn the engine off and then restart it. If the light still
stays on or comes back on again while driving, the
vehicle needs service. Have the TCS inspected as
soon as possible. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10 and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6
for more information.
Also see Competitive Driving Mode on page 4-11 for
more information.
3-63
Lane Departure Warning Light
For vehicles with the lane
departure warning system,
this light briefly comes
on green, while starting
the vehicle, to indicate
that it is working.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light comes on when
the engine is very hot.
This light also comes on briefly when the vehicle is
started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light will then go off.
This light also comes on green if the system detects a
left or right lane marking. It flashes, changes to amber
and three beeps sound if a detected lane marking is
crossed without using a turn signal. For more information,
see the Index in the Navigation Manual.
3-64
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the cooling
system. Driving with engine coolant temperature light on
could cause the vehicle to overheat, see Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-36.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-34 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for more
information.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows
the engine coolant
temperature.
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure light, this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started and
provides information about
tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
When the Light is On Steady
It can be used to see when the engine has warmed
up and to make sure the cooling system is operating
properly. If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,
the engine coolant is too hot and the engine coolant
temperature warning light comes on. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-34 for more information.
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the
proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-54 for more
information.
3-65
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-66
for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
This comes on briefly
while starting the engine.
If it does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
3-66
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage
the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
The following can prevent more serious damage to the
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and may cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.
3-67
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running.
To perform a check engine light bulb check with the
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in
the passenger compartment. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-26. Press the bottom of the Acc. button on
the instrument panel and hold the button down for
3-68
five seconds. The instrument panel, including the
check engine light, will light up and the ignition will be
on, but the engine will not start — press the bottom of
the Acc. button only briefly, less than five seconds,
the accessory power mode will be turned on, but not
the ignition. After the bulb check, press and release
the Acc. button again to turn the ignition off and avoid
draining the vehicle’s battery.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if the battery has recently been replaced or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
For vehicles with an oil
pressure light, if there
is a problem with the oil,
the light may stay on
after the engine is started,
or comes on while
driving.
This light indicates that oil is not going through the
engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine
could be low on oil or could have some other oil problem.
Have it fixed right away.
The oil light could also come on in the following
situations:
• The light comes on briefly when the ignition is
turned on to show that it is working properly.
If it does not come on with the ignition on, there
may be a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have
it fixed right away.
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Theft-Deterrent System
on page 2-21.
• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, a
chime sounds and the light may blink on and off.
This is normal.
3-69
Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-38 for more information.
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3-36 for more
information.
3-70
This light comes on
whenever the cruise
control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-16 and Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 3-20 for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9
for more information.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
It works only when
the engine is on.
If the fuel supply gets low, the “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
message appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
and a single chime sounds. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-79 for more information.
All of the following situations are normal and do not
indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
3-71
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the status
of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used
to display warning/status messages. All messages will
appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster, below the tachometer and
speedometer. The DIC buttons are located on the
instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the current driver and the
information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle
system information and the warning/status messages.
The bottom line of the DIC display shows either the
odometer, the trip odometer A or the trip odometer B
information on the left side. Only one odometer can
appear at a time. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-72 for information
on changing the display to show the odometer or trip
odometer information. The bottom line of the DIC display
also shows the outside temperature on the right side
and the shift lever position indicator in the center.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-30
for more information on the shift lever positions.
3-72
When the sport mode is active, an S will appear next
to the shift position indicator on the center of the DIC
display. When the manual mode is active, an M will
appear on the DIC display. When the normal mode is
active, only the shift position indicator will appear. While
the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active, the DIC
will change to show the selected gear. See “Driver Shift
Control (DSC)” under Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-30 for more information.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) has different modes
which can be accessed by pressing the four DIC buttons
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering
wheel.
DIC Buttons (Base Level)
If your vehicle does
not have a Head-Up
Display (HUD), these
are the buttons for the DIC.
If you have an STS-V, the DIC also has additional vehicle
information displays which include engine boost, engine
oil temperature, oil pressure, and transmission fluid
temperature.
See “MPH (km)” later in this section for more information
on the digital speed display.
AB 3 00 (Trip Information): Press the top of this
button to scroll through the odometer, trip odometer A
and trip odometer B. Press and hold the bottom of
this button to reset each trip odometer back to zero.
4 // (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
« 4 ª (Information):
Press the top or bottom of this
button to scroll through the available vehicle information
displays which include digital speed display, if your
vehicle has this feature, fuel range, fuel economy,
fuel used, average speed, timer, battery voltage, tire
pressure, and engine oil life, if your vehicle has this
feature.
EM (English/Metric): Press this button to change the
display from English to metric.
3-73
DIC Buttons (Uplevel)
To adjust the brightness of the HUD image, see Head-Up
Display (HUD) on page 3-43.
If the vehicle has a HUD,
these are the buttons for
the DIC.
For information on adjusting the instrument panel
brightness, see Instrument Panel Brightness on
page 3-40.
4
// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
3
(Trip Information): Press this button to scroll
through the odometer, trip odometer A and trip
odometer B. To reset each trip odometer, either press
the reset button or press and hold the trip information
button until the trip odometer displayed returns to zero.
« 4 ª (Information):
Press the top or bottom of this
button to scroll through the available vehicle information
displays which include digital speed display, if your
vehicle has this feature, fuel range, fuel economy,
fuel used, average speed, timer, battery voltage, tire
pressure, engine oil life, if your vehicle has this feature,
and display units. See “MPH (km)” later in this section
for more information on the digital speed display.
« ~ ª (Head-Up Display): Press this button to
change the position of the HUD on the windshield. Press
the top part of the button to move the HUD image up.
Press the bottom part of the button to move the HUD
image down.
3-74
Information Display Menu Items
The following display menu items can be displayed by
pressing the information button.
MPH (km/h)
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the vehicle’s
speed digitally in either miles per hour (mph) or
kilometers per hour (km/h).
MILES RANGE (km RANGE)
MPG INST (L/100 km INST)
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based
on the current driving conditions and will change if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are driving
in traffic making frequent stops, the display may read one
number, but if you enter the freeway, the number may
change even though you still have the same amount of
fuel in the fuel tank. This is because different driving
conditions produce different fuel economies. Generally,
freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city
driving.
This display shows the current fuel economy. This
number reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle
has right now and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average fuel economy, this
display cannot be reset.
Once the range drops below about 40 miles (64 km)
remaining, the display will show LOW RANGE.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
message will be displayed. See “Fuel Level Low”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79
for more information.
MPG AVG (L/100 km AVG)
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this display
was reset. To reset MPG AVG, press the reset button.
The display will return to zero.
GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display.
To reset GAL FUEL USED, press the reset button.
The display will return to zero.
AVG MPH (AVG km/h)
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle
in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
This average is calculated based on the various vehicle
speeds recorded since the last reset of this display.
To reset AVG MPH, press the reset button. The display
will return to zero.
HUD Speed Advisor ON/OFF
(On Vehicles with HUD)
If the vehicle has HUD, you can choose to have the
Speed Limit/Speed Advisory display appear in the HUD.
The DIC will toggle between ON and OFF. Press the
reset button to make your selection. See Head-Up
Display (HUD) on page 3-43 for more information.
3-75
SPEED LIMIT: XXX MPH (SPEED LIMIT:
XXX Km/h) or ADVISORY: XXX MPH
(ADVISORY: XXX Km/h)
(On Vehicles without HUD)
This display will show the speed limit or the advised
speed as determined by the information on the map
disc in the navigation system. If there is no map disc in
the navigation system, this display will not be available.
The speed limit and speed advisory displays on the
DIC and the HUD, if equipped, are for reference only.
There may be segments of road where speed data
has not been captured or times where incorrect speed
data, or no speed data, will be displayed by the DIC and
the HUD due to the navigation system not correctly
matching the vehicle’s position to the actual road.
Be aware of this and obey posted speed limits
wherever you drive.
SPEED ALERT
This display will allow you to customize the speed alert
warning. You can choose to have no warning display,
or to have it display at the limit, at 5 mph (km/h) over
the limit, or at 10 mph (km/h) over the limit. The DIC
will toggle between OFF, AT LIMIT, +5, +10 (MPH
or Km/h). Press the reset button to make your selection.
3-76
TIMER OFF
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the information
button until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays. To turn on
the timer, press the reset button until TIMER ON displays.
The timer will then start. To turn off the timer, press the
reset button again until TIMER OFF displays. The timer
will stop and display the end timing value. To reset the
timer, press and hold the reset button after the timer has
been stopped. The display will return to zero.
BATTERY VOLTS
This display shows the current battery voltage. If the
voltage is in the normal range, the value will display.
For example, the display may read 13.2 BATTERY
VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the display will have LOW
after it. If the voltage is high, the display will have HIGH
after it. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage
may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
This is normal. See Charging System Light on page 3-61
for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC may display a message. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-79 and Electric Power
Management on page 3-42 for more information.
Tire Pressure
ENGINE OIL LIFE
This display shows the pressure for each tire in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). If the
tire pressure is normal, the value will display. If the tire
pressure is low or high, LOW or HIGH will appear on
the display with the value. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-64 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-79 for more information. Press the information
button to scroll through the following displays:
If your vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated
oil life remaining. If you see 99% ENGINE OIL LIFE
on the display, that means that 99% of the current oil
life remains.
LF TIRE: This display shows the pressure in the driver
side front tire.
RF TIRE: This display shows the pressure in the
passenger side front tire.
LR TIRE: This display shows the pressure in the driver
side rear tire.
RR TIRE: This display shows the pressure in the
passenger side rear tire.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of
a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message will appear on the display. Change
the oil as soon as possible. In addition to the engine oil
life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance
is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
and Engine Oil on page 5-18.
After an oil change, reset the ENGINE OIL LIFE display.
To reset, see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-21.
The display will show 100% ENGINE OIL LIFE after
it has been reset. Also clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message from the display.
ENGLISH DISPLAY UNITS
(METRIC DISPLAY UNITS)
This display allows you to select between English and
metric units of measurement if your vehicle has the
uplevel DIC. Press the reset button to switch between
English and metric units.
Blank Line
This display shows no information.
3-77
ENGINE BOOST (STS-V Only)
Odometer
This display shows a graphic that indicates the amount
of boost the engine is receiving in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the trip information button until the odometer
appears on the DIC display. The odometer shows the
total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (STS-V Only)
This display shows the engine oil temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
OIL PRESSURE (STS-V Only)
This display shows the oil pressure in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
TRANS (Transmission) FLUID TEMP
(Temperature) (STS-V Only)
This display shows the transmission fluid temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
Trip Information Display Menu Items
The following display menu items can be displayed by
pressing the trip Information button.
3-78
Trip Odometer
Press the trip information button until trip
odometer A or B appears on the DIC display. The trip
odometer shows the current distance traveled since
the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time.
For base level vehicles, each trip odometer can be reset
to zero separately by pressing and holding the bottom of
the trip information button while the desired trip odometer
is displayed. For uplevel vehicles, reset each trip
odometer by pressing the reset button or by pressing and
holding the trip information button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
DIC Warnings and Messages
ADVISORY: XXX MPH (KM/H)
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
This message displays when the Speed Alert has been
turned on through the DIC Information Menu and the
vehicle is at or above the advised speed. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-72 for more
information.
The text messages are the same for both the base
audio and Navigation systems unless otherwise
indicated.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press the reset button to acknowledge that
you received the messages and to clear them from
the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be cleared. Take any messages
that appear on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the messages will only make the messages
disappear, not correct the problem.
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off. See Headlamps on page 3-32 for
more information.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on. See Headlamps on page 3-32 for
more information.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-79
BATTERY NOT CHARGING SERVICE
CHARGING SYS (System)
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
This symbol appears with
this message.
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when the electrical charging
system is overcharging the battery. When the system
detects that the battery voltage is above an estimated
16 volts, this message displays.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s
accessories:
This message displays when the system detects that the
battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable level.
The battery saver system starts reducing certain features
of the vehicle that may be noticeable. At the point that
the features are disabled, this message is displayed.
It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
To monitor battery voltage on the DIC, press the
information button until BATTERY VOLTS displays.
3-80
• Turn on the exterior lamps and radio.
• Set the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed
on the highest setting.
• Turn the rear window defogger on.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts
when the engine is running. To monitor battery voltage
on the DIC, press the information button until
BATTERY VOLTS displays.
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
This symbol appears with
this message.
If this message appears while driving or after starting
your vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately
to determine the cause of this problem.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
reduce the load on the electrical system by turning off
the accessories.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
To monitor battery voltage on the DIC, press the
information button until BATTERY VOLTS displays.
This message displays when the electrical system is
charging less than 10 volts or the battery has been
drained.
If this message appears immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving,
but may take a few hours to do so. Consider using
an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning
home or to a final destination. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on
page 5-18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.
After resetting the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, reset the engine
oil life system separately. For more information on
resetting the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-21.
3-81
CHECK BRAKE FLUID
CHECK WASHER FLUID
This message displays if the ignition is on to inform the
driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brake
system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-62
for more information.
This symbol appears with
this message.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays when the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it
is on and tightened properly.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See
Tires on page 5-54, Loading the Vehicle on page 4-24,
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64. The DIC also
shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-72. If the tire pressure is low, the low
tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure
Light on page 3-65.
3-82
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir
as soon as possible. See Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38 for more information.
CLEAN RADAR
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control system is disabled because the radar is blocked
and cannot detect vehicles in your path. It may also
activate during heavy rain or due to road spray. To clean
the system, see “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 3-20.
COMPETITIVE DRIVING (STS-V Only)
ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the competitive driving
mode is turned on with the TC (traction control) button.
The TC (traction control) light comes on when the
competitive driving mode is on. The Traction Control
System (TCS) will not operate while in competitive
driving mode. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
Competitive Driving Mode on page 4-11 for more
information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-34 for more information.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears with
this message.
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 3-64.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-36 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
3-83
ENGINE HOT – AC
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-65.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the
air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
3-84
ENGINE POWER REDUCED
This message displays when the engine power is being
reduced to protect the engine from damage. There could
be several malfunctions that might cause this message.
Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s ability to
accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no reduction
in performance, proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle
is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed
while this message is on, but acceleration and speed may
be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as
possible.
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCED
RPM’S (Revolutions Per Minute)
This message displays when your vehicle is in an
overheated engine operating mode. If this message
appears, the vehicle has determined that continued
operation at the existing engine speed may lead to
engine overheating. The vehicle automatically limits
engine RPMs to prevent engine overheating. You may
notice the vehicle upshifting early or reduced speeds
while this message is displayed. When the engine oil
returns to a safe operating temperature, this message
clears from the DIC and the vehicle returns to normal
operation. Your vehicle does not require service when
this message is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This symbol appears with
this message.
HOOD AJAR
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays when the hood is not closed
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed
completely. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
This message displays when the battery in the keyless
access transmitter is low. Replace the battery in the
transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless
Access System Operation on page 2-5.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
on page 3-71 and Fuel on page 5-5 for more information.
3-85
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system, this message may display if the LDW system
does not activate due to a temporary condition. See the
Index in the Navigation manual for more information.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays when the driver side rear door
is not closed completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
3-86
NO FOBS DETECTED
This message displays if the vehicle does not detect the
presence of a keyless access transmitter when you have
attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has just
closed. The following conditions may cause this message
to appear:
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving the
keyless access transmitter away from these devices
when starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA devices
and remote garage and gate openers may also
generate Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) that
may interfere with the keyless access transmitter.
Do not carry the keyless access transmitter in the
same pocket or bag as these devices.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as airports,
automatic toll booths, and some gas stations, have
EMI fields which may interfere with the keyless
access transmitter.
If moving the transmitter to
different locations within
the vehicle does not help,
place the transmitter in the
center console transmitter
pocket with the buttons
facing forward and then
press the START button.
NO FOB OFF OR RUN?
This message displays when the keyless access
transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while you
are trying to turn the ignition off. Your vehicle may be
near a strong radio antenna signal causing the keyless
access system to be jammed. The vehicle remains in
ACCESSORY until OFF or START has been pressed or
10 minutes has expired. If you turn the ignition off and
you cannot find the keyless access transmitter, you will
not be able to restart the vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter needs to be inside of the vehicle in order for
the vehicle to start. See Starting the Engine on page 2-27
for more information.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery
voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be detected properly.
3-87
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-18 for more information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low.
A multiple chime sounds when this message is
displayed. See Engine Oil on page 5-18 for more
information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible when this message is displayed.
3-88
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays when the passenger side front
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
PRESS START AND BRAKE TO START
ENGINE
This message displays when you need to press down
on the brake pedal while pressing the start button on
the electronic keyless ignition when trying to start
your vehicle. See Starting the Engine on page 2-27
for more information.
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control system is not activating due to a temporary
condition. Your vehicle does not require service.
This message also displays when either of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver turns off the head-up display (HUD)
while the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged.
• The driver attempts to engage the Adaptive Cruise
Control while the HUD is off.
If this message appears when attempting to activate the
system, continue driving for several minutes and then
try activating the system again.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears with
this message.
SERVICE AC (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if a drop in heating
and air conditioning efficiency is noticeable.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-58 for more information.
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
This message displays when a problem with the panic
brake assist system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system, this message may display to indicate that the
LDW system is not working properly. If this message
remains on after continued driving, the system needs
service. See your dealer/retailer. See the Index in the
Navigation manual for more information.
3-89
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control system is disabled and needs service.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and this message displays, both SBZA displays
will remain on indicating there is a problem with the SBZA
system. If these displays remain on after continued
driving, the system needs service. See your dealer/
retailer. See the Index in the Navigation manual for
more information.
SERVICE STABILITY SYS (System)
Your vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system
called StabiliTrak®. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle
with the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak
option have a stability enhancement system called
Enhanced StabiliTrak.
3-90
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the stability system.
If this message comes on while driving, pull off the road
as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting
the system by turning the ignition off then back on. If this
message still stays on or comes back on again while
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the stability
system inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 or
Enhanced StabiliTrak® on page 4-6 for more information.
For vehicles with the Active Steering with Enhanced
StabiliTrak option, in some cases when the SERVICE
STABILITY SYS message is displayed, a larger degree
of steering wheel input at low vehicle speeds and a
smaller degree of steering wheel input at higher vehicle
speeds may be required.
SERVICE STEERING SYS (System)
Your vehicle has a speed variable assist steering
system. Your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle may have
the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option.
See “Active Steering” under Steering on page 4-12.
This message displays if a problem is detected with
the speed variable assist steering system or the Active
Steering system. When this message is displayed, you
may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle
increases or feels heavier, but you will still be able to
steer the vehicle. See Steering on page 4-12 for more
information. Have the steering system inspected by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
If the SERVICE STEERING SYS message appears
because the Active Steering system needs service,
normal power steering is still operational. However,
compared to Active Steering, normal power steering
requires a larger degree of steering wheel input at
low vehicle speeds and a smaller degree of steering
wheel input at high vehicle speeds. The center position
of the steering wheel may be different. You may
continue to drive your vehicle with normal power
steering, but have the steering system inspected
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
If the Active Steering system needs service, the system
may be operating in the Stability Secure Mode and
the STABILITY SECURE MODE message will display.
See Enhanced StabiliTrak® on page 4-6.
When certain steering faults are present, the vehicle
speed may be limited. If vehicle speed is limited,
the SPEED LIMITED TO XXX message will display.
See “Active Steering” under Steering on page 4-12.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
This message displays when the suspension system
is not operating properly. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle has the Active
Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option and the
suspension system needs service, the Enhanced
StabiliTrak system may be operating in the Stability
Secure Mode and the STABILITY SECURE MODE
message will display. See Enhanced StabiliTrak®
on page 4-6.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-65. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 5-68 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-91
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the
hood open and closed switches. The switches may need
to be replaced. When this message is displayed, the
theft-deterrent system will still be protecting the interior of
the vehicle, however, the hood area will not be protected
at this time. Also, the remote start function will not work
when this message appears. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with
the transmission. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
has been turned off. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 2-44 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-72
for more information.
3-92
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may be
blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This message
may also display during heavy rain or due to road spray.
Your vehicle does not need service. For cleaning
instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-118.
See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-44 for more
information.
SPEED LIMIT: XXX MPH (KM/H)
This message displays when the Speed Alert has been
turned on through the DIC Information Menu and the
vehicle is at or above the speed limit. See DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-72 for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX
This message displays when the vehicle speed is
limited to XXX, mph in English mode and km/h in
Metric mode, because the vehicle detects a problem
in the steering, stability control, or suspension system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE
STABILITY SYS (System) ACTIVE
If your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle has the Active
Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option, this message
displays when the Competitive Mode for stability control
has been turned on using the TC (traction control) button.
See Enhanced StabiliTrak® on page 4-6 for more
information. When the Enhanced StabiliTrak Competitive
Mode has been activated, traction control operates in
competitive mode and cannot be turned off. Also, the
Active Steering and the Magnetic Ride Control systems
operate in the Performance Mode. For more information,
see “Active Steering and Magnetic Ride Control” in the
Index in the Navigation manual.
This message displays any time the StabiliTrak system
or Enhanced StabiliTrak system is actively assisting
with directional control of the vehicle. Slippery road
conditions may exist when this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. This message
may stay on for a few seconds after StabiliTrak
stops assisting with directional control of the vehicle.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 or Enhanced
StabiliTrak® on page 4-6 for more information.
STABILITY SECURE MODE
If your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle has the Active
Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option, this message
displays when the stability control system is in the
secure mode. Stability Secure Mode is set automatically
when certain system faults or vehicle conditions are
detected. When the Stability Secure Mode is activated,
the stability control system will not respond to driver
requests to change the stability mode until the next
ignition cycle or until the vehicle condition or fault
is returned to normal. See Enhanced StabiliTrak®
on page 4-6 for more information.
STABILITY SYS (System) NOT READY
This message displays if the StabiliTrak system is
not ready. Two conditions may cause this message
to display:
• The vehicle needs to be driven in a straight line
until the sensors are centered. Once the sensors
are centered, the StabiliTrak system is ready
and the STABILITY SYS READY message displays.
• The system needs to warm up. This may occur
when first starting your vehicle and driving away
during cold winter weather. This is normal.
To acknowledge this message, press the
reset button.
The StabiliTrak performance is affected until the
STABILITY SYS READY message is displayed in the
DIC. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more
information.
3-93
STABILITY SYS (System) OFF
STABILITY TOURING MODE
This message displays any time StabiliTrak or
Enhanced StabiliTrak is turned off using the TC (traction
control) on/off button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10 and “Enhanced StabiliTrak and Traction
Control Mode Selection” under Enhanced StabiliTrak® on
page 4-6 for more information. When this message has
been displayed, StabiliTrak or Enhanced StabiliTrak is
no longer available to assist with directional control of the
vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-6 or Enhanced StabiliTrak® on
page 4-6 for more information.
If your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle has the Active
Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option, this message
displays when the Stability Touring Mode is re-activated
by using the traction control button after:
STABILITY SYS (System) READY
This message displays any time StabiliTrak is turned
back on using the TC (traction control) on/off button.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10
for more information. When this message has been
displayed, StabiliTrak is ready to assist with directional
control of the vehicle, if needed. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-6 for more information.
• Driving in the Stability Competitive Mode.
• The stability control system is turned off by
the driver.
This message may also display after exiting STABILITY
SECURE MODE when certain system faults or vehicle
conditions have been cleared. See Enhanced
StabiliTrak® on page 4-6.
STARTING DISABLED THEFT
PROBLEM
This message displays when incorrect conditions exist
within the theft-deterrent system. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
STARTING DISABLED THROTTLE
PROBLEM
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
3-94
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays if the theft-deterrent system
has detected a break-in attempt while you were away
from your vehicle.
TRACTION ACTIVE
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. The message stays on
for a few seconds after the TCS stops limiting wheel spin.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10 for more
information.
TRANS (Transmission) HOT IDLE
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead
to costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until the transmission cools down or until
this message is removed.
3-95
TRUNK OPEN
Other Messages
This symbol appears with
this message.
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have
come on at the same time, press the reset button.
• ACCESSORY ACTIVE
See Ignition Positions on page 2-26.
• KNOWN FOB
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely.
•
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
MAX # FOBS LEARNED
•
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
OFF/ACC (Accessory) TO LEARN
•
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
READY FOR FOB X
•
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
SHIFT TO PARK
•
See Starting the Engine on page 2-27 and Shifting
Into Park on page 2-34.
WAIT XX MIN (Minutes)
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km). Turn off
the turn signal.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
3-96
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
{ CAUTION:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-27 for more information.
3-97
Setting the Clock
Radio(s)
To adjust the time:
1. Press w, located on the radio, to enter the
main menu.
w until SET CLOCK displays.
Press w to select SET CLOCK.
Turn w to adjust the time.
Press w to update the time and VEHICLE TIME
2. Turn
3.
4.
5.
UPDATED displays.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
To adjust the date:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until SET DATE displays.
Press w to select SET DATE.
Turn w to adjust the date.
Press w to update the date and VEHICLE
1. Press
2.
3.
4.
5.
DATE UPDATED displays.
3-98
Playing the Radio
O
(Power): Press to turn the system on and off.
n (Volume): Turn to increase or to decrease the
volume.
SRCE (Source): Press to select between the radio or
the CD player.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Station
The audio system has RDS features that are available
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS
information.
BAND: Press to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2.
With RDS:
• Stations can be selected based on programming
• Stations with traffic announcements can be selected
• Announcements concerning local and national
emergencies can be received.
• Messages display from radio stations.
RDS relies on receiving specific information from radio
stations and only works when the information is available.
In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. Contact the radio station if this happens.
When the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters display instead of the frequency.
RDS stations can also provide the time of day, a
program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.
w
(Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
© ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the previous or next
station and stay there. The radio only seeks stations
with a strong signal in the selected band, and the sound
mutes while seeking.
© ¨ (Scan): Press to scan stations or preset
stations. The radio only scans stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
To scan stations:
1. Press and release © or ¨ , SCAN displays.
The radio goes to a station, plays for five seconds,
then goes to the next station.
2. Press and release
© or ¨ again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations:
1. Press and hold © or ¨ for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds and PSCAN
displays. The radio goes to the first preset station,
plays for five seconds, then goes to the next preset
station.
2. Press and release
© or ¨ to stop scanning.
3-99
A LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: The radio can be set
to search for local stations or stations that are further
away for a larger selection.
To select between LOCAL or DISTANT:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until SEEK LOCAL or SEEK DISTANT
1. Press
2.
displays.
3. Press
w to select either LOCAL or DISTANT.
4. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the original
display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for the display
to time out.
To search for stations, press © or ¨ . If the system
is set to LOCAL, SEEK displays and seeks to stations
only with strong signals. If the system is set to DISTANT,
D-SEEK displays and seeks to stations with weak and
strong signals.
This feature does not function with the XM™ radio
stations.
3-100
4
(Information): Press while in XM mode to retrieve
three different categories of information related to the
current song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or
PTY. To view this information:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until INFO displays.
Press w to select INFO. The display changes
1. Press
2.
3.
to show the additional XM information.
4. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for
the display to time out.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM, six XM1
and six XM2), can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons.
To program preset stations:
1. Tune to a station and select the equalization, DSP,
or PTY (program type) setting if desired.
2. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for two seconds until a beep sounds.
The set preset station number displays above the set
pushbutton. If the numbered pushbutton is pressed
for less then two seconds, the radio tunes to the
station set to that pushbutton.
3. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: When Autostore is used, the
radio automatically searches the selected band and
stores the six radio stations with the strongest signal.
The stations are stored by signal strength, not sequential
order. This feature does not function with XM radio
stations.
To program autostore presets:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until AUTOSTORE PRESETS displays.
Press w to select AUTOSTORE PRESETS.
1. Press
2.
3.
The radio begins searching and AUTOSTORE
displays.
4. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for
the display to time out.
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature stores two
different kinds of station presets. HOME can be used
for local stations and AWAY for stations outside of
the local broadcasting area. This feature does not
function with the XM radio stations.
To set preset stations for home and away:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until PRESETS HOME/AWAY displays.
Press w to select HOME or AWAY.
1. Press
2.
3.
4. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for
the display to time out.
5. Follow the steps for programming presets or
autostore presets.
The radio presets do not have to be reset when the
vehicle is started, or when the battery power is removed.
3-101
Adjusting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until BASS-MID-TREBLE displays.
Press w to enter the tone settings.
Press w to scroll through the settings.
Turn w to increase or to decrease the bass,
1. Press
2.
3.
4.
5.
midrange, or treble. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
6. Press
w to set the adjustment.
7. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for the
display to time out.
3-102
AUDIO EQUALIZER: Use this feature to choose one of
the following customized equalization settings.
•
•
•
•
•
•
EQ0 (Normal)
EQ1 (Pop)
EQ2 (Rock)
EQ3 (Jazz)
EQ4 (Talk)
EQ5 (Country)
To choose an equalization setting:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until EQUALIZER displays.
Press w to set the equalization setting and the
1. Press
2.
3.
equalization setting displays.
4. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for
the display to time out.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
RDS Messages
To adjust the balance or fade:
ALERT: Displays when local or national emergency
announcements are received. If the radio tunes to a
related network station for the announcement, it returns
to the original station when the announcement ends.
The announcement should be heard even if the volume
is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, it will stop
playing during the announcement.
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until BALANCE-FADER displays.
Press w to enter the settings.
Press w to scroll to BALANCE or FADER.
Turn w to adjust the BALANCE to the right or
1. Press
2.
3.
4.
5.
the left speakers and the FADER to the front or the
rear speakers.
6. Press
w to set the adjustment.
7. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for
the display to time out.
EQ0 does not display while in this mode.
• The RDS alert feature is not supported by all RDS
radio stations.
• The RDS alert feature cannot be turned off.
• Alert is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system.
Displays if the current RDS station has a message.
The message displays the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc. If the entire message does not display,
parts of the message appear every three seconds
until the message is completed. MSG disappears
from the display once the completed message has
displayed.
3-103
MSG (Message): Displays if the current RDS station
has a message. The message can display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the entire
message does not display, parts of the message appear
every three seconds until the message is completed.
MSG disappears from the display once the completed
message has displayed.
TA (Traffic Announcement): Displays when the
feature is turned on and allows the radio to automatically
seek radio stations that broadcast traffic announcements.
• If the current radio station broadcasts traffic
announcements the station will not change.
• If the current radio station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, the radio seeks to the first station
that does. If the radio cannot find a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, No Traffic
displays.
To display the last message:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until RECALL RDS MESSAGE displays.
Press w and the message displays.
1. Press
2.
3.
Once the message displays, MSG disappears from the
display until another new message is received.
TP (Traffic Program): Displays when the radio
detects a signal from an RDS station that has traffic
announcement broadcast capability.
• If a CD is playing and the previous radio station
broadcasts traffic announcements, the radio
interrupts the CD for the traffic announcement.
To turn TA on or off:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE displays.
Press w to select ON or OFF. An X appears in
1. Press
2.
3.
the box when ON is selected.
4. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for
the display to time out.
3-104
Activating Program Type (PTY)
Stations (RDS and XM™)
3. Press w to select ON or OFF. An X appears in
the box when ON is selected.
4. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for
the display to time out.
PTY lets the radio search for stations with specific
types of music. When this feature is turned on, the
PTYs display above the pushbuttons in place of the
programmed preset stations. Not all stations support
PTYs and the radio may not go to all of the stations with
that music type when pressing the pushbutton.
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency lets
the radio switch to a stronger station with the same
program type.
The selectable PTYs are:
This feature does not function with XM radio stations.
•
•
•
•
•
•
CNTRY (Country)
CLASS (Classical)
EASY
JAZZ
POP
TALK
To turn PTY on or off:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until PROGRAM TYPE MODE displays.
1. Press
2.
To turn AF on or off:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until ALTERNATE FREQ. displays.
Press w to select AF OFF, AF ON, or AF REG.
1. Press
2.
3.
An X appears in the box when ON is selected.
4. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for
the display to time out.
3-105
Radio Message
Using the Single CD Player
THEFTLOCK: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has been activated. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Load a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in. The CD player can play the
smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring.
Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in
the same manner.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-114 XM Radio
Messages later in this section for further detail.
• The CD begins playing after it is loaded if the
ignition and the radio are on.
• The CD starts to play where it was last stopped if it
was the last selected audio source when the radio
is turned on.
• The CD stays in the player when the ignition or
radio is turned off.
• A CD can be loaded with the radio off, but it does
not start playing until the radio is turned on.
When a CD is loaded, CD displays and the CD
functions display above the pushbuttons in place of the
programmed preset stations. The track number displays
as each new track starts to play.
F1 { (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse quickly
within a track. Release to resume playback. The elapsed
time of the track displays.
F2 | (Forward): Press and hold to advance quickly
within a track. Release to resume playback. The elapsed
time of the track displays.
3-106
F3 RDM (Random): Press to listen to the tracks in a
random, rather than sequential order. RANDOM displays.
Press again to turn off random play. RANDOM
disappears from the display.
F4 RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track over again.
REPEAT displays. Press again to turn off repeat
play. REPEAT disappears from the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press to display the time of the
track. Press again to remove the time of the track from
the display.
© ¨ (Seek):
Press to go to the previous or next track
on the CD.
© ¨ (Scan): Press to listen to each track for
10 seconds. The CD goes to a track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press
again to stop scanning.
SRCE (Source): Press to select a source, either radio
or CD. The CD must be loaded to select the source
and to play. CD displays if a CD is loaded. If a CD is
not loaded, the display does not change from the radio
source.
Z
(Eject): Press to stop a CD when it is playing
or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject can be
used when the ignition and the radio are off.
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer
M (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and release
M . Please Wait displays.
3. When INSERT displays, load a CD partway into the
slot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
If the radio is on, the CD begins to play automatically.
CD displays and the number of the CD and the
track number displays.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and hold M for two seconds. Please Wait
displays and a beep sounds.
3. When INSERT displays, load the first CD partway
into the slot, label side up, and the player pulls it in.
4. Wait until INSERT displays again to load the
next CD.
5. Repeat Step 4 until all the desired CDs are loaded.
If the radio is on, the lased CD loaded begins to play
automatically. CD displays and the number of the
CD and the track number displays.
3-107
F1 DISCn (Down): Press to go to the previous CD.
F2 DISCm (Up): Press to go to the next CD.
F3 CD REV { (Reverse): Press to go to the previous
track. Press and hold to reverse quickly within the
track. Release to resume playback.
F4 CD FWD | (Forward): Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold to advance quickly within the track.
Release to resume playback.
F5 MODE: Press to select from:
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of the
CD(s). NORMAL does not display while in this mode.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track over
again. RPT TRCK displays. Press F5 MODE again to
turn off repeat play. RPT TRCK disappears from the
display.
• RPT DISC (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over again.
RPT DISC displays. Press F5 MODE again to turn off
repeat play. RPT DISC disappears from the display.
3-108
• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on
the current CD in random, rather than sequential
order. RDM TRCK displays. Press F5 MODE again
to turn off random play. RDM TRCK disappears from
the display.
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the CDs
loaded in random, rather than sequential order.
RDM ALL displays. Press F5 MODE again to turn off
random play. RDM ALL disappears from the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press to display the time of the
track. Press again to display CD PLAY MODE.
© ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the previous or the next
track on the CD.
© ¨ (Scan): Press to listen to each track for
10 seconds. The CD goes to a track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press
again to stop scanning.
Z (Eject): Press to eject the CD that is currently
playing, or press and hold to eject all of the CDs loaded.
A beep sounds. Eject can be used when the ignition
and the radio are off.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
To clean a CD, use a soft lint free cloth, or dampen a
clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water. Wipe the CD from the center to
the edge.
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing
an MP3 CD-R disc. For more information on how to play
an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3 on page 3-111
later in this section.
Care of the CD Player
Care of CDs
Use a marking pen to identify CDs, do not add labels.
The sound quality of the CD player can be reduced
because of:
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the CD
player.
• The CD-R quality.
• The method of recording the CD-R.
• The quality of the music that has been recorded on
the CD-R.
• The way the CD-R has been handled.
Store CDs in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from dust and direct sunlight. The CD
player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface
of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD may not play properly or at all. Do not
touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
3-109
CD Messages
Configurable Radio Display Keys
If the CD ejects, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
The four keys located on each side of the radio display
can be configured to adjust the radio features and other
non-radio related features. The configurable keys can be
changed at any time. Once a feature is programmed to a
key, the feature does not display when programming the
remaining configurable keys.
To program the configurable radio display keys:
• The CD player is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD should play.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
2.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible. See
3.
Using an MP3 on page 3-111 later in this section.
4.
• A problem may have occurred while burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until SETUP displays.
Press w to enter into SETUP.
Turn w until CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
1. Press
displays.
5. Press w to enter into CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS.
6. Turn and then press w to select the
configurable key to be changed. The currently
assigned feature displays.
7. Turn w to find the feature that will be stored to
the key.
8. Press w to select the desired feature. The
display updates by showing the symbol of the
feature selected next to the configurable key.
9. Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key.
3-110
Using an MP3
File Naming
MP3 CD-R Disc
Song title, artist name, and album are available for
display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
MP3 Format
The MP3 player will only play CD-R discs. It can read
and play a maximum of:
•
•
•
•
•
50 folders.
11 folders in depth
50 playlists
10 sessions
255 files
All folders, playlists, sessions and files over the
maximum are ignored.
When recording an MP3 disc, make sure that:
• Playlists use an .m3u or .wpl extension.
• Standard audio and compressed audio files are not
mixed on the same disc.
• The disc is finalized when using multiple sessions.
The song name that is displayed on the radio is the
song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song
name is not present in the ID3 tag, the radio displays the
file name without the file extension as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename do not display.
Order of Play
Playlists are accessed before files or folders in the root
directory.
CD’s that have playlists play the tracks in the following
order:
1. After the first track in the first playlist ends, play
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
playlist.
2. After the last track of the last playlist ends, play
restarts from the first track of the first playlist.
3-111
CD’s that do not have playlists play the tracks in the
following order:
1. The first file in the root directory plays.
2. After all files from the root directory have played,
files in the folders play.
3. After playing the last file from the last folder, play
restarts with the first file in the root directory.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists created by WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software can be
accessed, but not edited by the radio, and are treated
as special folders containing compressed audio
song files.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder and displays on
the radio as F1 ROOT. All compressed audio files in
the root directory are accessed before folders in the
root directory.
Empty Directory or Folder
Empty folders and directories do not display on the
radio and the system ignores them and advances to
the next directory or folder that has compressed audio
files in it.
3-112
No Folder
On a CD that only contains compressed audio files in
the root directory, the next and previous folder functions
do not work. The radio displays ROOT when displaying
the name of the folder.
On a CD that only contains playlists and compressed
audio files, the next and previous folder functions search
playlists first and then search compressed audio files
in the root folder. The radio displays ROOT when
displaying the name of the folder.
Playing an MP3
F1 r (Previous Folder): Press to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
Press and hold F1 r to reverse quickly within a track.
Release to resume playback. REV and the elapsed
time of the track displays.
Pressing F1 r while in folder random mode goes to
the previous folder and plays the tracks in that folder in
random order.
F2 [ (Next Folder): Press to go to the first track in
the next folder.
Press and hold F1 r to advance quickly within a track.
Release to resume playback. FWD and the elapsed
time of the track displays.
Pressing F2 [ while in folder random mode goes to
the next folder and plays the tracks in that folder
in random order.
F3 RDM (Random): Press to listen to the tracks in a
random, rather than sequential order. Random can
be used on the entire disc or the current folder.
While in random, pressing and releasing ©or
to the previous or to the next random track.
¨ goes
• To play the tracks on entire disc in random, press
and release F3 RDM until RDM TRCK displays.
Once all of the tracks in the current folder or playlist
have played, the system moves on to the next folder
or playlist and plays all of the tracks in random order.
• To play the tracks in the current folder in random,
press and release F3 RDM until RDM FLDR
displays. This feature does not work with playlists.
• To turn random off, press and release F3 RDM until
F4 RPT (Repeat): Single tracks or folders can be
repeated.
• To repeat the current track, press and release
F4 RPT until RPT TRCK displays.
• To repeat the tracks in the current folder, press and
release F4 RPT until RPT FLDR displays.
• To turn repeat off, press and release F4 RPT until
NORMAL displays.
F6 DISP (Display): Press to switch between the
elapsed time of the track and the MP3 playback
information.
© ¨ (Seek): Press and release to go to the start of
the previous track or the start of the next track. Press and
hold for more than two seconds to search the previous or
next tracks at two tracks per second. Release to stop
searching and to play the track.
© ¨ (Scan): Press to scan the tracks in each folder.
The radio goes to the next track, plays for 10 seconds,
then goes to the next track. Press again to stop
scanning.
NORMAL displays.
3-113
w (Tune): Turn to fast track reverse or advance
through the tracks in all folders or playlists. The
track number and file name displays for each track.
Turning w while in random will fast track reverse
or advance the tracks in sequential order.
XM Radio Messages
4
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
(Information): Press to view the Title, Artist, Album,
or Folder names. To view this information:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until INFO displays.
Press w to select INFO. The display changes
1. Press
2.
3.
to show the additional MP3 information.
4. Press one of the following pushbuttons to view that
specific information.
•
•
•
•
F1 TTLE (Title): Displays the title name.
F2 ATST (Artist): Displays the artist name.
F3 ALBM (Album): Displays the album name.
F4 FLDR (Folder): Displays the folder name.
5. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the original
display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for the display
to time out.
3-114
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the presets, choose another
station for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle.
For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this message is received
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
3-115
Navigation/Radio System
Voice Recognition
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Bluetooth®
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands
if there is too much background noise.
For vehicles with a Navigation System and Bluetooth,
see the Navigation System manual for information about
how to use the Bluetooth system.
For vehicles without a Navigation System, the Bluetooth
system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a
Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls.
The system can be used while the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY position. The range of the Bluetooth
system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones support
all functions, and not all phones are guaranteed to work
with the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See gm.com/
bluetooth for more information on compatible phones.
3-116
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and over-rides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
is used if the volume is turned down too low.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-131 for more
information.
b g (Push To Talk):
Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
3-117
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone.
Use a name that best describes the phone.
This name will be used to indicate which phone
is connected. The system then confirms the
name provided.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-118
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds.
The system responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone
number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3-119
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
3-120
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
Deleting Name Tags
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
main menu.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
•
•
•
•
Dial
Digit Dial
Call
Re-dial
3-121
Using the Dial Command
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
3-122
Using the Call Command
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the original
call with no action.
3-123
To Mute a call
Three-Way Calling
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.
b g to link all
Ending a Call
To end a call:
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “End Call”. The call is then ended.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can
be muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
3-124
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with
“Say a number to send tones” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
3-125
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds
with “Say a name tag to send tones” followed
by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on
how to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
3-126
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Radio Personalization
For vehicles with a Navigation System, see the
Navigation System manual supplied with the vehicle for
more information on accessing the main menu and for
descriptions of the menu items for the Navigation system.
Accessing the Main Menu
Radio Main Menu Item Descriptions
To access the main menu:
e
1. Press CNFG or
2. Turn
w to enter the main menu.
w to scroll through the menu items.
The main menu consists of the following menu items:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
e BASS - MID - TREBLE
x BALANCE - FADER
e EQ EQUALIZER
H/A (HOME/AWAY) PRESETS
AUTOSTORE PRESETS
CAT CATEGORY
TA TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE
RECALL RDS (Radio Data System) MESSAGE
A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
8 SET CLOCK
B SET DATE
4 INFO (Information)
BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: This item
allows the bass, midrange and treble features of
the audio system to be adjusted. See “Setting the Tone
(Bass/Treble)” under Radio(s) on page 3-98 for more
information.
x BALANCE - FADER: This item allows the balance
and fader features of the audio system to be adjusted.
See “Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)” under
Radio(s) on page 3-98 for more information.
e EQ (Equalizer): This item allows one of the five
preset equalizations for the audio system to
be selected. See “Audio Equalizer” under Radio(s)
on page 3-98 for more information.
H/A (Home/Away) PRESETS: This item allows either
the home or away preset radio stations to be selected.
See “Presets Home/Away” under Radio(s) on page 3-98
for more information.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This item allows the radio to
automatically store stations with the strongest signals
as presets. See “Autostore Presets” under Radio(s)
on page 3-98 for more information.
LANG LANGUAGE
SETUP
3-127
CAT (Category): This item allows radio stations based
on preset categories to be selected. See “Activating
Program Type (PTY) Stations” under Radio(s) on
page 3-98 for more information.
TA (Traffic Announcement): This item allows the
TA feature to be turned on and off. See “TA (Traffic
Announcement)” under Radio(s) on page 3-98 for
more information.
See “Local/Distant Selection” under Radio(s) on
page 3-98 for more information.
8 SET CLOCK: This item allows the clock to be
adjusted.
See Setting the Clock on page 3-98 for more
information.
B
SET DATE: This item allows the date to be
adjusted.
RECALL RDS MESSAGE: This item allows the RDS
radio station messages broadcast by a radio station
to be viewed. See “MSG (Message)” under Radio(s)
on page 3-98 for more information.
See Setting the Clock on page 3-98 for more
information.
A
4
SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This item allows the audio
system to seek only local radio stations with the strongest
signal or to seek all radio stations with a strong signal in a
large area. Use LOCAL while in urban areas where there
are several strong radio station signals and you want to
limit the number of stations to those with the strongest
signals only. Use DISTANT while in rural areas where
there are fewer radio station signals available.
3-128
(Information): This item allows XM satellite radio
service and CD MP3 playback information to be
displayed. See “ 4 (Information)” under Radio(s)
on page 3-98 for more information.
LANG (Language): This item allows the language on
the radio display to be changed.
To change the language:
w to enter the main menu.
Turn w until LANGUAGE displays.
Press w to enter the language settings and
then turn w to scroll through the following
1. Press
2.
3.
available languages:
•
•
•
•
•
ENGLISH
GERMAN
FRENCH
SPANISH
JAPANESE
4. Press
w to set the language.
5. Press F6 to exit the display. To return to the
original display, repeatedly press F6 or wait for
the display to time out.
SETUP: The following submenus are available when
this item is selected:
•
•
•
•
PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU
DRIVER SELECTION
DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
SETUP Submenu Items
The following choices are available for programming.
PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU
This item turns the entire list of personalization features
on or off, and allows a preferred setting for up to two
people to be programmed. The number of available
features varies depending on which options the vehicle
has. A check mark appears after it when this item is
on. For more information on the PERSONAL SETTINGS
MENU item, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-61.
3-129
DRIVER SELECTION
The following submenu displays when this item is
selected:
•
•
•
•
DRIVER 1
DRIVER 2
RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
For more information on the DRIVER SELECTION
submenu item, see “Recalling Driver Settings”
and “Storing Driver Settings” under Memory Seat,
Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-77.
DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
The following submenu displays when this item is
selected:
• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
• STORE EXIT SETTINGS
3-130
For more information on the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
submenu item, see “Recalling Exit Settings” and “Storing
Exit Settings” under Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel on page 2-77.
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
(Base Audio System)
This item allows the four configurable keys located to
the left and right of the audio display to be customized.
See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” under Radio(s)
on page 3-98 for programming information.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
The vehicle has audio steering wheel controls and they
could differ depending on the vehicle’s options.
Left-Side Standard
Audio Steering Wheel
Controls and Cruise
Control Cancel
Left-Side Audio
Controls With Heated
Steering Wheel and
Cruise Control Cancel
Left-Side Audio
Controls With Heated
Steering Wheel,
Adaptive Cruise Control
GAP, and Cruise
Control Cancel
Right-Side Audio
Controls
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
¨SEEK ©: Press to go to the next or previous radio
station with a strong signal in the selected band
while listening to the radio.
3-131
Press ¨or © to go to the next or previous track while
a CD is playing,
SRCE (Source): Press to select between AM, FM, XM,
or CD.
b g (Mute/Voice Recognition):
Press and release
to silence the vehicle speakers only. The audio of
the wireless and wired headphones, if the vehicle has
these features, does not mute. Press and release
this button again, to turn the sound on.
SCAN: Press and hold for a few seconds to scan radio
stations, the radio goes to the next strongest station
in the selected band, plays for a few seconds, then goes
to the next station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, press and
y z (Previous/Next): Press to go to the next or
previous radio station stored as a favorite while listening
to the radio.
• For vehicles with a navigation system and OnStar®,
Press y or z to go to the next or previous track while
a CD is playing.
+ e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease the
volume.
hold b g for two seconds to initiate speech
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
press and hold b g for two seconds and then
say “OnStar” to interact with the OnStar system.
See OnStar® System on page 2-50 in this manual
for more information.
• For vehicles with a navigation system and
Bluetooth®, see the Navigation System manual
for more information.
• For vehicles without a navigation system, and
with Bluetooth or OnStar, press and hold b
two seconds to interact with the OnStar® or
Bluetooth system. See OnStar® System on
page 2-50, or Bluetooth® on page 3-116 for
more information about these features.
3-132
g for
Radio Reception
XM Satellite Radio Service
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-133
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post
on the glass.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
3-134
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
or the rear of the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear
of obstructions for clear radio reception.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3
Braking .........................................................4-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6
Enhanced StabiliTrak® .....................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .......................4-10
Competitive Driving Mode ..............................4-11
Magnetic Ride Control™ ................................4-12
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ...................................4-12
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .......................4-12
Steering ......................................................4-12
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-15
Passing .......................................................4-15
Loss of Control .............................................4-15
Competitive Driving .......................................4-17
Driving at Night ............................................4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-18
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-19
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-19
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-20
Winter Driving ..............................................4-21
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................4-23
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-24
Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-24
Towing ..........................................................4-29
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-29
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-29
Towing a Trailer (Vehicles Without
Heavy Duty Cooling) ..................................4-31
Towing a Trailer (Vehicles With
Heavy Duty Cooling) ..................................4-32
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-7.
{ CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
4-2
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your
vehicle while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10
and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 or Enhanced
StabiliTrak® on page 4-6.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-62.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
4-3
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster if you do
a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, the
pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops,
you will still have some power brake assist. But you will
use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up,
it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be
harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 3-63.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-4
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might
hear the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help more than even
the very best braking.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
4-5
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system
called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled
system that assists with directional control of the vehicle
in difficult driving conditions.
If the vehicle has all-wheel-drive and has Active
Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak, see Enhanced
StabiliTrak® on page 4-6.
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to help steer the vehicle in the intended direction.
When the system activates, a STABILITY SYS ACTIVE
message will be displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-79. A noise may be heard or a vibration felt in the
brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the vehicle
in the intended direction.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak, a
SERVICE STABILITY SYS message will be displayed on
the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79.
When this message is displayed, the system is not
operational. Driving should be adjusted accordingly.
4-6
StabiliTrak comes on automatically whenever the
vehicle is started. To help assist with directional control
of the vehicle, always leave the system on. StabiliTrak
can be turned off, however, by using the Traction
Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak button. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-10.
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates,
it will automatically disengage. Cruise control may be
reengaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise
Control on page 3-16 or Adaptive Cruise Control
on page 3-20 for more information.
Enhanced StabiliTrak®
All-wheel-drive (AWD) vehicles with the Active Steering
with Enhanced StabiliTrak option have an enhanced
computer controlled vehicle stability system that assists
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. This system coordinates automatic control of
the Active Steering System, the Magnetic Ride Control
Suspension System, and the Brake Control System
for better vehicle performance.
During extreme cold temperature conditions, the active
steering function may be temporarily disabled which may
cause the steering wheel to be offset from the center
position while driving straight. This is normal operation
and the vehicle is safe to drive in these cases.
Stability control activates when the computer senses a
difference between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. Stability control
automatically adjusts the front road wheel steering
angle, modifies the suspension stiffness, and selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to help maintain directional control of the vehicle.
driver who desires less stability control intervention.
See Competitive Driving Mode on page 4-11. When the
Stability Control Competitive Mode has been activated,
traction control operates in competitive mode and
cannot be turned off. The STABILITY COMPETITIVE
MODE message will be displayed on the DIC.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79.
When the system activates, a STABILITY SYS
ACTIVE message displays on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-79. It is normal to hear a noise or feel
vibration in the brake pedal when the system is working.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the intended direction.
When operating the vehicle in the Stability Competitive
Mode, the system provides less stability control
intervention. Driving should be adjusted accordingly.
If cruise control is engaged when Enhanced StabiliTrak
activates, the cruise control will automatically disengage.
Cruise Control may be re-engaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-16, or Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 3-20 for more information.
Enhanced StabiliTrak comes on automatically in the
Stability Touring Mode, when the vehicle is started.
The Stability Touring Mode is recommended for normal
driving. Enhanced StabiliTrak also has Stability
Competitive Mode that is turned on by pressing the
Traction Control (TC) button twice quickly. This mode is
designed to be used by the performance conscious
When the Stability Competitive Mode has been selected,
the Active Steering and Magnetic Ride Control Touring
Mode is not available. These systems are automatically
changed to the Performance Mode, providing more
response to road conditions and quicker steering
response. For more information, see “Active Steering
and Magnetic Ride Control Mode” in the Index of
the vehicle’s Navigation Manual.
To assist with directional control of the vehicle, always
leave the system on. Stability control can be turned
off however, by using the TC button. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-10. The STABILITY
SYS OFF message will be displayed on the DIC.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79.
4-7
If there is a problem detected with Enhanced StabiliTrak,
the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message will be
displayed on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-79. When this message is displayed, the
system is not operating. Driving should be adjusted
accordingly.
When certain faults or vehicle conditions are detected,
the Stability control will automatically go into a secure
mode and the STABILITY SECURE MODE message will
be displayed on the DIC. When the Stability Secure
Mode is activated, the stability control system will
not respond to driver requests to change the stability
mode until the next ignition cycle or until the vehicle
condition or fault is returned to normal. When the
Stability Secure Mode is activated, other messages
may be displayed, such as SERVICE STEERING SYS,
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS or CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE on the DIC. When the Stability Secure
Mode is activated, a larger degree of steering wheel
input at low vehicle speeds and a smaller degree
of steering wheel input at high vehicle speeds may be
required. Stability Secure Mode will be activated if
a compact spare tire is being used. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-79 and Compact Spare
Tire on page 5-114.
4-8
Persistent operation of the vehicle in the STABILITY
SECURE MODE may be an indication that the vehicle
needs to be serviced by your dealer/retailer.
When certain faults are present, the vehicle’s speed
may be limited and the SPEED LIMITED TO XXX
message will be displayed on the DIC. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-79. When the
vehicle’s speed is limited, other messages may
be displayed, such as SERVICE STABILITY SYS,
SERVICE STEERING SYS or SERVICE SUSPENSION
SYS on the DIC. Have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
Enhanced StabiliTrak and Traction Control
Mode Selection
Enhanced StabiliTrak can be operated in Touring Mode
or Competitive Mode. It can also be turned off. The
TC button is used to change stability control modes
(Touring, Competitive or Off) as well as to turn traction
control on or off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10. The following information describes
the operation of the TC button for changing Traction
Control and Stability Control Modes.
When the vehicle is started, Stability control comes on
automatically in the Stability Touring Mode.
• To change from Stability Touring Mode to Stability
Competitive Mode, press the TC button twice quickly
and the STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message
is displayed on the DIC. Enhanced StabiliTrak must
be in Stability Touring Mode with TCS on before
changing to Stability Competitive Mode.
• To change from Stability Touring Mode to Stability
Off Mode, press and hold the TC button until the
STABILITY SYS OFF message is displayed
on the DIC.
• To change from Stability Competitive Mode to
Stability Touring Mode, press and release the
TC button and the STABILITY TOURING MODE
message will be displayed on the DIC.
• To change from Stability Off Mode to Stability
Touring Mode, press and release the TC button and
the STABILITY TOURING MODE message will be
displayed on the DIC.
• To change from Stability Off Mode to Stability
Competitive Mode, press and release the TC button
to enter Stability Touring Mode. Press the TC button
twice quickly and STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE
displays on the DIC
• To turn traction control off while in the Stability
Touring Mode, press and release the TC button and
the traction control system warning light will come on.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10.
• To turn traction control on while in the Stability
Touring Mode, press and release the TC button and
the traction control system warning light will turn off.
• To change from Stability Competitive Mode to
Stability Off Mode, press and hold the TC button until
the STABILITY SYS OFF message is displayed on
the DIC. The DIC will briefly display the STABILITY
TOURING MODE message prior to displaying the
STABILITY SYS OFF message.
4-9
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the system
operates if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. On an
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the system will operate if
it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning
to lose traction. When this happens, the system brakes
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to
limit wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal.
This warning light comes
on if there is a problem
with TCS.
4-10
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-63. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is
started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
road conditions, the system should always be left on,
but TCS can be turned off if needed.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate
heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle’s driveline
could be damaged.
When TCS is switched off on AWD and STS-V vehicles,
the system may still be working. This is normal and
necessary with the hardware on the vehicle.
It may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on
page 4-24 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow on page 4-23 for more information. See Winter
Driving on page 4-21 for information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.
To turn the system off,
press the TCS/StabiliTrak
button located near the
shift lever.
For AWD vehicles with the Active Steering with
Enhanced StabiliTrak option, the TCS/StabiliTrak
button is used to turn traction control on and off and to
select between three stability control modes: Touring,
Competitive and Off. See Enhanced StabiliTrak®
on page 4-6 for instructions on selecting the proper
stability control mode.
Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button and TCS
will turn off and the Traction Control System Warning
Light will come on. Press the button again to turn
the system back on.
Competitive Driving Mode
The STS-V driver can select this optional handling mode
by pressing the Traction Control button, located near the
shift lever, quickly two times. STABILITY COMPETITIVE
MODE is displayed on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) when the system is working. Competitive driving
mode allows the driver to have control of the power
applied to the rear wheels, while the StabiliTrak® system
helps steer the vehicle by selective brake application.
In competitive mode, the levels at which StabiliTrak is
engaged have been modified to better suit a performance
driving environment. When the traction control warning
light is on, the Traction Control System will not be
operating. Adjust your driving accordingly.
When the Traction Control button is pressed again,
the Traction Control System will be on. The traction
engaged symbol will be displayed briefly in the DIC.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79
for more information.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect the vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-11
Magnetic Ride Control™
Steering
Vehicles with this feature automatically adjust the ride
of the vehicle based on driving conditions. Magnetic Ride
Control monitors the suspension system to determine
the proper system response. If the controller detects a
problem within the system, the DIC will display a
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-79 for more
information. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Power Steering
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when traction
is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
at all times. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is
no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the
front axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as
needed for road conditions.
4-12
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Speed Variable Assist Steering
Your vehicle has a steering system that continuously
adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle
speeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solid
feel at highway speeds.
Active Steering
All-wheel-drive vehicles with the Active Steering with
Enhanced StabiliTrak® option have an electronically
controlled active steering system. The active steering
system uses the steering actuator to automatically adjust
the front road wheel turning angle based on vehicle
speed and how much you turn the steering wheel.
This system reduces steering effort at low speeds,
improves steering feel at moderate speeds, and
reduces steering sensitivity at higher speeds.
During some operating conditions, the active steering
might deactivate to protect the system from damage. You
might notice that the center position of the steering wheel
is changed. Unless there is a SERVICE STEERING SYS
message, the system will return to normal operation as
soon as the condition ceases, usually within a very short
period of time.
At low speeds, the active steering system requires less
movement of the steering wheel to change vehicle
direction than the normal power steering system.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
When certain steering faults are present, the active
steering deactivates and vehicle speed might be limited.
The SERVICE STEERING SYS and SPEED LIMITED
TO XXX messages will be displayed. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-79. The normal power steering
system is still operational. You might notice that the
center position of the steering wheel is changed and that
more steering effort at low speeds and less steering effort
at high speeds is required. You can continue to drive your
vehicle with normal power steering but you should have
your dealer/retailer inspect the steering system as soon
as possible in order to have the problem corrected and
the steering wheel position centered.
When stability control activates, the system
automatically adjusts the front road wheel steering
angle, modifies the suspension stiffness, and selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to help maintain directional control of the vehicle.
Adjustments to the steering will not be felt in the
steering wheel. See Enhanced StabiliTrak® on page 4-6.
It is recommended that the battery not be disconnected
when the steering wheel is turned from the center
position. If this occurs, the center position of the steering
wheel could be temporarily changed a small amount.
You can continue to operate your vehicle and, after
a short time, the center position of the steering wheel
will return to normal.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and your speed. While in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
If you need to reduce speed, do it before you enter the
curve, while the front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-13
To help you steer in the direction you want to go, during
certain sharp or sudden cornering maneuvers, gear
selection is controlled. This will maximize the available
drive wheel torque and minimize the transmission
response time and shift activity. During this kind of
maneuver, the transmission shifts automatically
as vehicle speed changes.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the
time for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-3.
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-14
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Your vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 76 to 127 mm,
(about one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-15
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid. If your traction control system
is off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-16
You might see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message
on the Driver Information Center. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-79 and StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-6 or Enhanced StabiliTrak® on page 4-6.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Competitive Driving
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
competitive driving.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive
driving, the engine may use more oil than it would
with normal use. Low oil levels can damage the
engine. Be sure to check the oil level often during
competitive driving and keep the level at or near the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range
on the engine oil dipstick. For information on how to
add oil, see Engine Oil on page 5-18.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep-standing or
flowing water.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
{ CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
4-18
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-54.
• Turn off cruise control.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
4-19
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
4-20
{ CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
The Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads,
but slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off
the traction control system to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4 improves
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
4-21
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside Service on page 7-7.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
CAUTION:
• Open a window about two inches on the side
•
•
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
CAUTION:
4-22
(Continued)
(Continued)
of the vehicle that is away from the wind to
bring in fresh air.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and
to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as
possible to save fuel.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-24.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-81.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
4-23
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label, and the Certification
label.
4-24
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires
on page 5-54 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-64.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-25
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer (Vehicles Without Heavy
Duty Cooling) on page 4-31 or Towing a
Trailer (Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling)
on page 4-32 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
4-26
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-27
Certification Label
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
either the driver’s door edge or the lower center
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification
label also shows the maximum weights for
the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Never exceed the GVWR
or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
4-28
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go
as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep
going.
Towing
{ CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if the disabled vehicle needs to be towed.
See Roadside Service on page 7-7.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” — towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, and “dolly
towing” — towing the vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a device known as
a “dolly”.
4-29
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 4-19.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed,
use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section for
more information.
4-30
Dolly Towing (Rear-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles) (STS Only)
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing the vehicle
may cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always tow the vehicle using the towing
procedures listed in this section or put the vehicle
on a flatbed truck or trailer.
Rear-wheel drive vehicles can be towed using a dolly.
To tow the vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-33.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles can only be towed on a
flat-bed truck or trailer.
Towing a Trailer (Vehicles Without
Heavy Duty Cooling)
Vehicles without heavy duty cooling are neither designed
nor intended to tow a trailer.
Dolly Towing (STS-V)
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing the vehicle
may cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always put the vehicle on a flatbed truck.
The STS-V can only be towed on a flat-bed truck or
trailer.
4-31
Towing a Trailer (Vehicles With
Heavy Duty Cooling)
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could
be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Vehicles with heavy duty cooling can tow a trailer if
equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment.
4-32
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read
the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your passengers.
So please read this section carefully before pulling a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
Pulling A Trailer
Weight of the Trailer
Here are some important points:
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer.
• The weight of the trailer tongue.
• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and
the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section
for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information
or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6
for more information.
4-33
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of
options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it
will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow.
If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the
GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight,
too. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-24 for more
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
4-34
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-24. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for
the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of
the trailer tongue.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by
the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If so, be sure to
seal the holes when the hitch is removed. If they are
not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the
engine’s exhaust can get into the vehicle. See
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36. Sealing the holes will
also prevent dirt and water from entering the vehicle.
Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Because the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, do not try to tap
into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Trailer Wiring Harness
All of the electrical circuits required for the trailer lighting
system can be accessed at the driver side rear lamp
connector. This connector is located under the carpet
on the rear corner of the trunk compartment.
4-35
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection
at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
4-36
Backing Up
Making Turns
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not.
It is important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
The vehicle has bulb warning lights. When a trailer
lighting system is plugged into the vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not let you know if
one of the lamps goes out. So, when the trailer lighting
system is plugged in, be sure to check the vehicle and
trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they are all
working. Once the trailer lamps are disconnected, the
bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of the vehicle
lamps is out.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic
transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning
the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see
Engine Overheating on page 5-34.
4-37
Parking on Hills
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
{ CAUTION:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
• Start the engine
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
4-38
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule
or Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect
these before and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-34.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ......5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle .................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-18
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-21
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-23
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-25
Cooling System ............................................5-26
Engine Coolant .............................................5-27
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-34
Engine Overheating .......................................5-34
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-36
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-38
Brakes ........................................................5-39
Battery ........................................................5-42
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-47
Rear Axle .......................................................5-48
Front Axle ......................................................5-49
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-50
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-51
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-51
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-51
Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-52
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-52
Windshield Replacement .................................5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-52
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Winter Tires .................................................5-55
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-56
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-59
Run-Flat Tires (STS-V) ..................................5-62
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-64
High-Speed Operation ...................................5-65
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-66
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-68
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-71
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-73
Buying New Tires .........................................5-74
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-76
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-77
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-79
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-79
Tire Chains ..................................................5-81
Lifting the Vehicle (STS-V) .............................5-82
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-84
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Without Selector Switch) ............................5-87
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
(With Selector Switch) ................................5-96
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage .......5-104
Changing a Flat Tire ...................................5-104
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ..............5-106
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire .........................................5-107
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...........5-112
Compact Spare Tire ....................................5-114
Appearance Care ..........................................5-115
Interior Cleaning .........................................5-115
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-116
Leather ......................................................5-117
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .......................................5-117
5-2
Wood Panels ..............................................5-117
Speaker Covers ..........................................5-118
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-118
Weatherstrips .............................................5-118
Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-118
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-119
Finish Care ................................................5-119
Windshield and Wiper Blades .......................5-120
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim ................................................5-120
Tires .........................................................5-121
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-121
Finish Damage ...........................................5-121
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-121
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-122
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-122
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-122
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-122
Electrical System ..........................................5-123
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-123
Headlamp Wiring ........................................5-123
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-123
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-123
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-123
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-124
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..........................5-128
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-134
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-64.
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-15.
5-4
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 6-18.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code V), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, you
might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
If the vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VIN Code A), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-122.
5-5
If the vehicle has the 4.4L V8 engine (VIN Code D), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. For best performance, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 93.
In an emergency, you can use regular unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane fuel is
used, do not perform any aggressive driving maneuvers
such as wide open throttle applications. You might also
hear audible spark knock during acceleration. Refill the
tank with premium fuel as soon as possible to avoid
damaging the engine. If you are using gasoline rated
at 91 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,
the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7
for additional information.
5-6
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-66. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
5-8
The tethered fuel cap is
located behind a hinged
fuel door on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will pop open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-118.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-66.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display if the fuel cap
is not reinstalled properly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-79 for more information.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-66.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-10
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located inside
the vehicle on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is located
under the front edge of the grille near the center.
Push the release lever up and raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
Your vehicle may be equipped with front compartment underhood sight shields, which surround the vehicle’s engine
cover. These sight shields will need to be removed in order to access some of the underhood components in
your vehicle.
To remove the sight shields, turn the fasteners on each shield to the left until they pop out. Then remove the fasteners
and lift the shields up and away from the tower to tower brace.
3.6L V6 Engine
5-12
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 3.6L V6 engine, here is what you will see:
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-124.
B. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
D. Battery. See Battery on page 5-42.
E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-54.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-37.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-39.
J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-34
and Cooling System on page 5-26.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
5-13
4.6L V8 Engine
5-14
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.6L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
A. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
C. Battery. See Battery on page 5-42.
D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-54.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-37.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-39.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-34
and Cooling System on page 5-26.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23.
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-124.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
5-15
4.4L V8 STS-V Engine
5-16
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine, here is what you will see:
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-124.
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
C. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
D. Battery. See Battery on page 5-42.
E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-54.
F. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
G. Intercooler System Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-37.
I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
J. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-39.
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-34
and Cooling System on page 5-26.
M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23.
If your vehicle is equipped with front compartment
underhood sight shields, before closing the hood be
sure to reinstall the sight shields. To reinstall the shields,
locate the tabs on the left and right sides and insert them
into the openings in the tower to tower brace. Then insert
the fasteners into the top of the shield and push the
fasteners back into place.
5-17
Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
V6 Engine
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
V8 Engine
5-18
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind
of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-134.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when you are through.
5-19
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
• GM4718M
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. Use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
5-20
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for
this vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
you need for good performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended
and could cause engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
Notice: If your vehicle is an STS-V model, the
engine uses a special oil filter. The use of any
other engine oil filter could lead to filter failure and
result in severe engine damage. Damage caused
by use of the wrong engine oil filter would not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the DIC
will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-79. Change the oil as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-21
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message in the DIC being turned on, reset
the system.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message must be reset. To reset the
message:
1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC to
show OIL LIFE.
2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the RESET button until
the percentage shows 100%.
If the percentage does not return to 100% or if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start the vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-22
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,
near the front. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on locating the
air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
4.6L V8 Engine shown, 3.6L V6 Engine similar
5-23
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
4. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the
bottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top of
the airbox cover toward the engine.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
5. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through
the opening in the airbox.
To inspect or replace the filter in the 3.6L V6 or
4.6L V8 engines, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws located on the top of
the cover.
2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that
it is not going across the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter.
3. Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from the
passenger’s side of the engine air cleaner/filter.
5-24
6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
See Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15
for the correct part number for the filter.
7. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine, there
is a special procedure for checking and changing the
air cleaner/filter. Because this procedure is difficult,
you should have this done at the dealership service
department. Contact your dealer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is
difficult, you should have this done at the dealer/retailer
service department. Contact your dealer/retailer for
additional information or the procedure can be found
in the service manual. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-15.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13.
5-25
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
CAUTION:
3.6L V6 Engine shown, 4.6L V8 and
4.4L V8 STS-V Engines similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s) (Out of view)
B. Mechanical Engine Cooling Fan (If equipped)
(Out of view)
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
5-26
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-34.
5-27
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
{ CAUTION:
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
outside temperature.
engine temperature.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
5-28
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the
FULL COLD/FROID line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool before
this is done.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the
coolant surge tank. Follow the arrow from the top of the
tank down the side to the horizontal mark. If it is not,
there could be a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant or take the vehicle
to a dealer/retailer for service.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located
on the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of
the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-29
Checking Intercooler System Coolant
(4.4L V8 STS-V Engine Only)
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the intercooler system pressure cap.
Turn off the engine. When the engine is cold, the coolant
level should be visible in the intercooler fill neck.
5-30
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-31
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can feel
the upper radiator hose getting hot. The upper
radiator hose is the largest of the hoses which
comes out of the radiator, on the passenger
side of the vehicle. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to slightly above
the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of
the coolant surge tank.
5-32
Start the engine and allow it to warm up.
How to Add Coolant to the
Intercooler System Fill Neck
(4.4L V8 STS-V Engine Only)
Turn the engine off and allow it to cool down, then
check to see if coolant is visible within the horizontal tube
section of the fill neck. If coolant is not visible, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant to the fill neck. Be sure the Intercooler System,
including the Intercooler System pressure cap, is cool
before doing so. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for
more information.
{ CAUTION:
Turning the Intercooler System pressure cap when
the engine and intercooler are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the Intercooler System pressure cap,
even a little, when the engine and intercooler
are hot.
1. Remove the Intercooler System pressure cap
when the Intercooler System, including the upper
intercooler hoses, are no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. This allows any pressure still left to
be vented.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-33
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the
fill neck, until the coolant reaches the COLD FILL
line on the fill neck.
With the Intercooler System pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run for a couple of minutes.
Then turn the engine off. By this time, the coolant
level inside the fill neck may be lower. If the level
drops to where coolant is no longer visible in the
horizontal tube section of the fill neck, with the engine
off add more of the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the fill neck until the level is again visible in the
horizontal tube section.
4. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the system
cools down again, see your dealer.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
5-34
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
There are two engine hot messages that could be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-79
DIC Warnings and Messages for more information.
If the engine is overheating, then you will find a coolant
temperature gage and a coolant warning light on the
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-65 and Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 3-64 for more information.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Service on page 7-7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-36 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-36 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 5-36 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
5-35
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
An overheat warning, can indicate a serious problem.
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
• Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If the engine coolant temperature gage is no longer
in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the
vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle
distance from the car in front of you. If the warning does
not come back on, continue to drive normally.
5-36
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Also, see ″Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode″ later in this section.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven
to a safe place in an emergency. Should an overheated
engine condition exist, an overheat protection mode
which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in
power and engine performance. An engine overheat
warning will indicate that an overheat condition exists.
Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in
the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss and change the oil. See Engine
Oil on page 5-18.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be within the HOT mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage
the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-13.
5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid
level is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-79 for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-38
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder reservoir is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for reservoir location and
access.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the
CHECK BRAKE FLUID message displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-79.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-39
What to Add
DOT-3 brake fluid is recommended. DOT-4 brake fluid
is also compatible with the vehicle’s brake system parts.
However, if DOT-4 fluid is used, it is recommended that
the brake hydraulic system be flushed and refilled with
new DOT-4 fluid at a regular maintenance service
every two years. See Additional Required Services on
page 6-6. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-13.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-118.
Brake Wear
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-40
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are
needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the
time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
Brake Pedal Travel
{ CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong
with the brakes.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications
in Capacities and Specifications on page 5-134.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
5-41
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-42 for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
5-42
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal locations or the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals of the
other vehicle. Then locate the remote positive (+)
location on your vehicle. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on
locations the terminals.
5-43
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
Engine Control Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket, or any cables that attach to the ECM
bracket, you may damage the ECM. Always attach
the negative cable to your vehicle’s remote negative
ground location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,
or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located on
the passenger side front shock tower. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12. You should
always use this remote ground location, instead of
the terminal on the battery.
5-44
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-45
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-46
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground
location is for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
All of the lubricant checks in this section apply to your
vehicle. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, there
is an additional system that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
5-47
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-48
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
5-49
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
5-50
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-52.
The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After the
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to
service any of the system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a
qualified technician service them.
5-51
Back-Up Lamps
Replacement Bulbs
To replace a back-up lamp bulb:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-15.
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up
3157K
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Replacement
The windshield is part of the Head-Up Display (HUD)
system. If you ever have to get the windshield replaced,
get one that is designed for HUD or the HUD image
may look out of focus.
2. Pull out the push pins holding down the top portion
of the cloth cover.
3. Fold the cover down slightly and locate the lamp
assembly.
4. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it straight
out to remove it from the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out and reinstall the
new bulb.
6. Put the cover back in place and reinstall the
push pins.
5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-15.
STS-V models will automatically move the windshield
wipers to the park position if the hood is open.
Make sure the hood is closed before replacing your
windshield wiper blades.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from
the windshield.
3. Replace the blade assembly with a new one.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage
the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
4. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
2. Squeeze the tabs on each side of the wiper blade
assembly and slide the assembly off the end of the
wiper arm.
5-53
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
{ CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-24.
CAUTION:
5-54
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-65 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
Low-Profile Performance Tires
Winter Tires
If your vehicle has 255/45ZR18, P255/45R18
or P275/40R19 size tires, they are classified as
low-profile performance tires. These tires are
designed for very responsive driving on wet or
dry pavement. You may also notice more road
noise with low-profile performance tires and that
they tend to wear faster. These performance tires
are not rated as all-season tires. Winter tires are
recommended for snow or ice covered roads.
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance
as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in
vehicle handling and braking.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
New Tires on page 5-74.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. The
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
5-55
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into
its sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The
letters and numbers following DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
5-56
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-77.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-114 and If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-84.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-64.
5-57
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
5-58
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the
maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-64.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
5-59
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-24.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-24.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-24.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
5-60
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-24.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-64 and Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-24.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-73.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-77.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-24.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
5-61
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-24.
Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare tire
and no tire changing equipment. Your vehicle also has a
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) which will alert
you if there is a loss of tire pressure in any of the tires.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-66.
5-62
{ CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose
control of your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph (90 km/h)
when the low tire warning light is displayed.
Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures
as soon as you can.
If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the side of
the road to change the tire. You can just keep on driving.
The vehicle’s run-flat tires can operate effectively with no
air pressure for up to 50 miles (80 km) at speeds up to
55 mph (90 km/h). The shorter the distance you drive and
the slower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire
will not have to be replaced. When a tire is filled with air,
it provides a cushion between the road and the wheel.
Because you will not have this cushion when driving on
a deflated run-flat tire, try to avoid potholes that could
damage your wheel and require replacement of it.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you have driven
on the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been
damaged, or if you have driven any distance on a
deflated run-flat tire, check with an authorized run-flat
tire service center, as soon as possible, to determine
whether the tire can be repaired or should be replaced.
To maintain your vehicle’s run-flat feature, all
replacement tires must be self-supporting tires.
To locate the nearest GM or authorized run-flat
servicing facility, call Roadside Service. See
Roadside Service on page 7-7 for details.
{ CAUTION:
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than other
tires and could explode during improper service.
You or others could be injured or killed if you
attempt to repair, replace, dismount, or mount a
run-flat tire. Let only an authorized run-flat service
center repair, replace, dismount, and mount
run-flat tires.
The valve stems on your vehicle’s run-flat tires have
sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). These sensors contain batteries which
are designed to last for 10 years under normal driving
conditions. See your GM dealer, if the TPMS sensors or
a wheel ever need replacement.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in the
vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not be
covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
in the vehicle’s run-flat tires.
5-63
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-64
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label lists
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and shows
the correct inflation pressures for your tires when
they are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the tire and loading information label, see Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-24. How you load your
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. The compact spare should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-114.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
High-Speed Operation
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following.
5-65
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires
to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-24.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the rim
flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
5-66
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-68 for
additional information.
5-67
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly, if the vehicle has one.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the
vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to
a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in
a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by
the driver. For additional information and details about
the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-72 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-79.
5-68
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-24 for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-71 and Tires on page 5-54.
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved
tire sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
Your vehicle, when new, included a factory-installed
Tire Inflator Kit. This kit uses a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants could damage
the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
on page 5-87 for information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire, if the vehicle has one. The spare tire does
not have a TPMS sensor. The DIC message should
go off once you re-install the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-74.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
5-69
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the
tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure,
do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated
on the tire’s sidewall. If using this method to match TPMS
sensors, the complete procedure outlined below must
be performed within 15 minutes of the vehicle being
stationary.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire/wheel positions, the matching
process stops and you will need to start over.
5-70
The TPM matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Press the push-button ignition switch to Acc.
3. Using the keyless access transmitter, lock and
unlock the vehicle’s doors.
4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, on the keyless access transmitter. The horn
sounds twice, indicating that the TPMS is ready,
and the sensor matching process can begin.
5. Start with the driver side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code
has been matched to this tire position.
7. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
8. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
9. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 6.
10. After hearing the confirming single horn chirp for the
driver side rear tire, a double horn chirp will sound to
signal the tire matching mode is no longer active.
Press the push-button ignition switch to Acc.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading information
label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for
New Tires on page 5-73 for more information.
Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle
has the following performance tire combinations:
• P235/50R17 size tires on the front wheels
and P255/45R17 size tires on the rear wheels.
• P235/50ZR18 size tires on the front wheels
and P255/45ZR18 size tires on the rear
wheels.
• P255/45R18 size tires on the front wheels and
P275/40R19 size tires on the rear wheels.
Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to
rear. Each tire and wheel should only be used
in the original front or rear position it is in.
Tire rotation is recommended if the vehicle is
equipped with P235/50R17 size tires on all four
wheel positions or 255/45ZR18 size tires on all
four wheel positions. These tires should be rotated
every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that the vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
your tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-73
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-79.
5-71
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-68.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-134.
{ CAUTION:
When rotating P235/50R17 size tires or
255/45ZR18 size tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
If the vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not
include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-64 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-24.
5-72
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-104.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-73
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers
over a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for mud and snow.
See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-56 for
additional information.
5-74
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle performing most like
it did when the tires were new. Replacing less
than a full set of tires can affect the braking and
handling performance of your vehicle.
The optional 18-inch performance tires,
size 255/45ZR18 99Y, used on some vehicles,
meets the General Motors Tire Performance
Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) rating but the
TPC Spec code has not been molded onto the tire’s
sidewall. If your vehicle has these tires, and you
need to replace them, you can still get these TPC
Spec rated tires by asking your GM dealer. Your
GM dealer can order these tires by part number.
This way, your vehicle will continue to give the
proper endurance, handling, traction, and ride
as the original tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose
snow tires with a lower speed rating, never exceed
the tire’s maximum speed capability.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other than
those originally installed on your vehicle), brands, or
types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes (other than those
originally installed on your vehicle), brands, or types
may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your vehicle’s
compact spare temporarily, it was developed for
use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-114.
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on it. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a
low-pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-66.
5-75
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are
listed on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-24, for
more information about the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
5-76
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-74 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
5-77
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Temperature – A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
{ WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
{ WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-78
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-79
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
5-80
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-104 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
If your VEHICLE has P255/45R17, P255/45ZR18,
P275/40R19, or 255/45ZR18 size tires, do not use
tire chains, as there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle and
you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust, or remove the device if it is contacting
the vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires only.
Notice: If your vehicle has P235/50R17 size tires,
use tire chains only where legal and only when you
must. Use only SAE Class S-type chains that are
the proper size for your tires. Install them on the rear
tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with
the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow
down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
5-81
Lifting the Vehicle (STS-V)
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to lift your vehicle. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
{ CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever in PARK (P) by pressing
the button on the front of the shift lever while
pushing the lever all the way toward the front
of the vehicle. Release the button.
Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle or the vehicle
may fall and cause your or others injury.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake
pedal down, set the parking brake with your
left foot.
4. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you can put blocks in front of and behind the wheels.
Also, see Shifting Into Park on page 2-34 and
Parking Brake on page 2-33 for additional
information.
5-82
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow the
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to
use the correct lifting points to avoid damaging
your vehicle.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To lift your vehicle properly, follow
the advice in this part.
Lifting From the Front
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure the jack you are using meets the
weight standards for your vehicle and is in
good working order.
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using only contacts
the jacking location lift points and is not leaning
on any other vehicle components such as the
rocker panels, the floor pan, or the stone guard
moldings.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
1. Locate the front lifting points using the diagram
above. The front lifting location is about 15 inches
(37 cm) from the rear edge of the front wheel well.
2. Place a block or pad between the jack and
the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
is centered on the front lifting point.
5-83
Lifting From the Rear
The rear lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, in front of the rear tires.
2. Place a block or pad between the jack and the
vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
is centered on the rear lifting point.
See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See Tires
on page 5-54. If air goes out of a tire, It is much more
likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and
what to do:
1. Locate the rear lifting points using the diagram
above. The rear lifting location is about 7 inches
(17 cm) from the front edge of the rear wheel well.
5-84
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
2. Park the vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and
spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-104.
To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5-87.
5-85
Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)
If this vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare tire
and no tire changing equipment. Run-flat tires can
operate effectively with no air pressure for a limited
distance and speed. These tires perform so well without
any air pressure that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
is used to alert you when there is a low tire condition.
{ CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose
control of your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph (90 km/h)
when the low tire warning light is displayed.
Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures
as soon as you can.
5-86
See Run-Flat Tires (STS-V) on page 5-62 and Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 5-66, for additional
information.
{ CAUTION:
Special tools and procedures are required to
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
procedures are not used you or others could
be injured and the vehicle could be damaged.
Always be sure the proper tools and procedures,
as described in the service manual, are used.
To order a service manual see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-15.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Without Selector Switch)
System Identification
If the vehicle has the tire sealant and compressor kit
shown above, follow the operating instructions under
‘‘Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit (With Selector
Switch).’’
If the vehicle has the tire sealant and compressor kit
shown above, see the operating instructions that follow.
5-87
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
{ CAUTION:
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended
pressure. Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
5-88
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to
store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
temporarily seal punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate
an under inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire sealant and
compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Service on
page 7-7.
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
Tire Sealant
The kit includes:
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. Air Only Hose
Air Compressor
(Black)
Tire Sealant Canister
G. Sealant/Air Hose
Power Plug
(Clear)
On/Off Button
Pressure Gage
5-89
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during
cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment
for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.
5-90
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-84. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage on page 5-104.
Make sure the on/off button (D) is in the off (O)
position.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (C).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-46.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
8. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gage (E) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop
and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.
9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gage (E). The
recommended inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.
The pressure gage (E) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off
until the correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating
hose from the tire valve. See Roadside Service on
page 7-7.
10. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak
air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 11 through 17
must be done immediately after Step 10.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
11. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
12. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
13. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
14. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (C) back in their original location.
5-91
15. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label
from the sealant
canister (B) and place
it in a highly visible
location.
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Service on page 7-7.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle.
The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired
or replaced.
16. Return the equipment to its original storage location
in the vehicle.
17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
18. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
5-92
20. Dispose of the used sealant canister (B) and
sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/
retailer or in accordance with local state codes
and practices.
21. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
22. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer within a 100 miles (161 km) of driving
to have the tire repaired or replaced.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-84.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage on page 5-104.
2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
3. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
4. Remove the power plug (C) from the air
compressor (A).
5. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
6. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stem
and push the lever down to secure it.
8. Plug the power plug (C) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-46.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
10. Press the on/off (D) button to turn the
compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
5-93
11. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (E). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-64.
The pressure gage (E) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn
the compressor off to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned on/off until
the correct pressure is reached.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
12. Press the on/off button (D) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
13. Unplug the power plug (C) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
14. Disconnect the air only hose (F) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
15. Replace the air only hose (F) and the power plug (C)
back in its original location.
16. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) from the
compressor (A).
5-94
To install a new sealant canister:
1. Align the sealant/air hose (F) with the slot in the air
compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister (B) down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (F) around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose (F) onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so the inflator filling
hose is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from the compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
5-95
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
(With Selector Switch)
System Identification
If the vehicle has the tire sealant and compressor kit
shown above, follow the operating instructions under
“Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit (Without Selector
Switch).
If the vehicle has the tire sealant and compressor kit
shown above, see the operating instructions that follow.
5-96
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
{ CAUTION:
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended
pressure. Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to
store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
temporarily seal punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate
an under inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire sealant and
compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Service on
page 7-7.
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
5-97
Tire Sealant
The kit includes:
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
A. Selector Switch
(Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
B. On/Off Button
C. Pressure Gage
D. Pressure Deflation
Button
5-98
E. Tire Sealant Canister
F. Sealant/Air Hose
(Clear)
G. Air Only Hose
(Black)
H. Power Plug
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-84. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
it’s storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 5-104.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during
cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment
for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-46.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
5-99
8. Turn the selector switch (A) counterclockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gage (C) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is
completelydispersed into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire
inflates with air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-64.
The pressure gage (C) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn
the compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until
the correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the
power plug from the accessory power outlet
and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve.
See Roadside Service on page 7-7.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through
18 must be done immediately after Step 11.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (H) back in their original location.
5-100
16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister (E) and
place it in a highly
visible location.
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Service on page 7-7.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle.
The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired
or replaced.
17. Return the equipment to its original storage location
in the vehicle.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
21. Dispose of the used sealant canister (E) and
sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance with local state
codes and practices.
22. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer within a 100 miles (161 km) of driving
to have the tire repaired or replaced.
5-101
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-84.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
it’s storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 5-104.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) and the power
plug (H).
5-102
3. Place the kit on the ground.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto the tire valve stem
by turning it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-46.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (A) clockwise to the Air
Only position.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn the
compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-64.
The pressure gage (C) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.
If you inflate the tire higher than the recommended
pressure you can adjust the excess pressure by
pressing the pressure deflation button (D) until the
proper pressure reading is reached. This option
is only functional when using the air only hose (G).
11. Press the on/off button (B) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the air only hose (G) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
14. Replace the air only hose (G) and the power plug
(H) and cord back in its original location.
15. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
The tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory
adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses,
balls, etc.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.
2. Press the canister release button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister which is available from
your dealer/retailer.
5. Push the new canister into place.
5-103
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Storage
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-15.
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have an STS-V model, there is no spare tire and
no tire changing equipment. The vehicle is equipped
with run-flat tires. See Run-Flat Tires (STS-V) on
page 5-62 for more information. If you have an STS
model, the vehicle may be equipped with a tire inflator
kit. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5-87
for more information. If the vehicle is not equipped
with a tire inflator kit, follow the directions for changing
a flat tire in this section.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
2. Remove the retainer that holds the tire sealant and
compressor kit in place.
3. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
the foam container.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse
the steps.
5-104
{ CAUTION:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-105
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
To access to the compact spare tire and jacking
equipment:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-15 for more
information.
2. Remove the compact spare tire cover.
3. Pull the stow rod (A) to remove it.
4. Turn the nut (B) holding the jack package container
counterclockwise and remove it. Then remove the
jack and wheel wrench.
5. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-114 for more information
about the compact spare tire.
5-106
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-104 for more information.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and the
wheel wrench (B).
2. Loosen all of the wheel nuts, but do not remove
them yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the
handle about 180 degrees, then flip the handle
back to the starting position. This avoids taking
the wrench off the lug nut for each turn.
5-107
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
3. Find the vehicle’s jacking location using the
diagram above and corresponding V–shaped
notches located in the plastic molding on the
vehicle’s frame. The notches in the plastic molding
are marked with a triangle shape.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
5-108
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to your
vehicle. Always position the jack so that when the
jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the notch
located inboard from the rocker molding.
6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into
the metal flange located behind the triangle on
the plastic molding as shown.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.
5-109
9. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire.
{ CAUTION:
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under
the vehicle.
5-110
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-104.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel.
{ CAUTION:
13. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise with
your hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
and spare wheel.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
11. Install the spare tire.
5-111
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
{ CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts can
cause the wheel to come loose and even come off.
This could lead to a crash. If you have to replace
them, be sure to get new original equipment wheel
nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and
have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-134 for wheel nut torque
specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-134 for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-112
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
Full-Size Tire and Tools
Compact Spare Tire and Tools
After you have put the compact spare tire on your
vehicle, you will need to do the following to store
the flat tire in your trunk.
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the
compact spare tire and tools in the trunk:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-15.
2. Store the jack and wheel wrench in the jack
container in the trunk.
When storing the jack, in the container, it must be
raised until the screw end is flush with the edge
of the jack.
3. Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as
possible.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
E. Jack Container
Package (With Wheel
Wrench and Jack)
F. Compact Spare Tire
G. Foam Support
H. Bolt
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-15.
A. Compact Spare
Tire Cover
B. Stow Rod Cap
C. Plastic Wing Nut
D. Retainer
2. Make sure the foam support (G) is in place in the
trunk area.
5-113
3. Reinstall the compact spare tire (F) making sure to
line up the wheel center hole with the bolt (H) and
place on the compartment floor.
4. Insert the jack container (E) with wheel wrench and
jack into the center of the compact spare tire making
sure to line up the wheel nut hole with the bolt (H) on
the compartment floor.
5. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer (D) and
wing nut (C).
6. Cover the exposed bolt with the stow rod cap (B).
7. Reinstall the compact spare tire cover (A).
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish
5-114
your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want. You must calibrate the tire inflation
monitor system after installing or removing the compact
spare. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-66.
The system may not work correctly when the compact
spare is installed on the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
The spare will last longer and be in good shape in case
you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
5-115
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Fabric/Carpet
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove
as much of the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
5-116
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
5-117
Speaker Covers
Washing Your Vehicle
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
5-118
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-118.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
5-119
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
5-120
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such
as ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Use only
approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
5-121
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine
Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-134 for your vehicle’s engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if
you ever need to order parts. The label has the
following information:
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
5-122
Electrical System
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Add-On Electrical Equipment
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily
borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out.
Replace the fuse as soon as you can.
5-123
Underhood Fuse Block
5-124
The underhood fuse block is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location and removal
procedure for the front compartment underhood sights
shields.
To access the fuses, push in the tabs located on each
side of the fuse block cover, then lift the cover off.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Fuses JCase
ABS MTR
AFS
Usage
ABS Module - ABS Module Stabilitrak
Active Front Steering
Fuses JCase
SPARE
Spare
STRTR
Starter
Fuses Mini
Usage
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
ABS
ABS IGN
AUX OUTLET
Climate Control Panel
CCP/RLY
COILS
FAN 2
Cooling Fan-High Speed
ECM 1
RPDB 1
Passenger Side Rear Fuse Block
RPDB 2
Passenger Side Rear Fuse Block
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
CCP
Blower Motor
Driver Side Rear Fuse Block
Antilock Brake Controller
Brake Vacuum Pump
Cooling Fan-Low Speed
LPDB 2
ABS Module-Stabilitrak
BRK VAC
PUMP
FAN 1
Driver Side Rear Fuse Block
Spare
SPARE
BLWR
LPDB 1
Usage
ECM/TCM
BATT
Climate Control Panel, Headlamp
Level Control, Active Cruise Control,
Relay Coils, Starter, Front Blower
Engine Control Module (ECM)
ECM, Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
TCM, Instrument Panel
ECM/TCM IGN ECM,
Cluster
5-125
Fuses Mini
Usage
Fuses Mini
EKM/I/P MDL
Easy Key Module (EKM), Instrument
Panel Module (I/P MDL)
ODD COILS
EVEN COILS
Even Ignition Coils, Even Fuel
Injectors
FOG LAMP
FRT PWR
OUTLET
FUEL COOL
HORN
HTD
WASH/AQS
HUD
I/BEAM
I/P MDL/ALDL
LIC DIM
Front Fog Lamps
Front Accessory Power Outlet
Fuel Cooling
Heated Headlamp Washer,
Air Quality Sensor
Heads-Up Display, Steering Column
Switch
IntelliBeam Relay
Instrument Panel Module, Assembly
Line Data Link Connector
License Plate, Instrument Panel
Dimming
Driver Side High Beam Headlamp
LT LO BEAM
Driver Side Low Beam Headlamp
LT PRK
Driver Side Park Lamp/Driver Side
Taillamp
Odd Ignition Coils, Odd Fuel
Injectors
Post Oxygen Sensor
PRE O2 SNSR Pre Oxygen Sensor, CAM Sensors
RAIN
SNSR/TPM
Rain Sensor, Relay Coil:
Headlamp Wash
RT HI BEAM
Passenger Side High Beam
Headlamp
RT LO BEAM
Passenger Side Low Beam
Headlamp
RT PRK
Passenger Side Park Lamp,
Passenger Side Taillamp
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
Horn
LT HI BEAM
5-126
POST O2
SNSR
Usage
Fuses Mini
V/CHK
WPR
Usage
Instrument Panel Module-Voltage
Check
Wipe/Wash Module Assembly
WPR SW/VICS Rain Sensor, Wiper Switch
Relays
Usage
A/C CMPRSR
CLTCH
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
ACCY
Accessory, Rain Sensor, Headlamp
Washer Relay Coil, Windshield
Wiper/Washer Module
BRK VAC
PUMP
Brake Vacuum Pump
FAN S/P
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
FRT BLWR
Front Blower Motor
FUEL COOL
Fuel Cooling Pump
HI BEAM
HI FAN SPD
HORN
High Beam Headlamp
Cooling Fan High Speed
Relays
Usage
LO FAN SPD
Cooling Fan Low Speed
LOW BEAM
W/O HID/HID
Low Beam Headlamp, High Intensity
Discharge (HID)
PRK LAMP
Parking Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimming, Rear License Plate Lamps
PWR/TRN
RUN CRNK
Engine Controls
Heated Washer Nozzle, Air Quality,
Antilock Brake System, Climate
Control Panel, TCM, ECM,
Instrument Panel Cluster
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
STRTR
Starter
WPR HI
Windshield Wiper High Speed
Circuit
Breakers
HDLP WASH
Usage
Headlamp Washer Motor
(Circuit Breaker)
Horn
5-127
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the
metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a
short that could damage the battery and or wires.
Avoid contact between the rear seat and the
fuse center whenever you remove or reinstall
the rear seat. Do not remove covers from any
of the covered parts, and do not store anything
under the seats.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the
vehicle.
5-128
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly routed through
the seat cushion or is twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. If the safety belt has
not been routed through the seat cushion at all, it
will not be there to work for the next passenger.
The person sitting in that position could be badly
injured. After reinstalling the seat cushion, always
check to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and are not twisted.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the
seat cushion is secured.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,
then route the safety belts through the proper slots
in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts
get twisted.
There is a fuse block located under the rear seat on the
driver side and passenger side of the vehicle. The rear
seat cushion must be removed to access the fuse blocks.
See “Removing the Rear Seat Cushion” listed previously
in this section.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs, then lift the
cover off.
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the
spring locks on both ends engage.
5-129
The vehicle may not have all the fuses listed below.
Driver’s Side
Fuses
AMP
INCLR PUMP
THEFT/SHFT
5-130
Usage
Amplifier
Inner Cooler Pump (Option)
Theft Sensors, Auto Shifter,
Power Sounder
Fuses
Usage
Magnetic
Ride
Control Module
MRTD MDL
(Option)
REAR DR MDL Rear Door Modules
Fuses
ELC EXH
DDM
TV/VICS/SCM
REAR
HTD/SEATS
SPARE
SPARE
IGN3
REAR SHLF
SPKR
MSM
TRUNK
RELSE SW
Usage
Electronic Level Control,
Exhaust Solenoid (Option)
Driver Door Module, Front Door
SubWoofers (Option)
Infotainment (Export Only),
Supervisory Control Module (Option)
Rear Heated Seats
Spare
Spare
Front Passenger Heated Seat,
Auto Shifter, Occupant Protection,
Electronic Tension Reducer for
Seatbelt
Rear Shelf Speaker (Option)
Memory Seat Module Lumbar
Trunk Release, Valet Lockout
Switch
Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,
BCK/UP LAMP Reverse
Inside Rearview Mirrors
AIR BAG/BATT Airbag
POS LAMPS Rear Taillamps
ELC CMPRSR Automatic Level Control (Option)
Relays
INCLR PUMP
Usage
Inner Cooler Pump (Option)
Level Control,
ELC CMPRSR Electronic
Compressor (Option)
Left Rear Taillamp, Position
LT POS
Lamps (Option)
Right Rear Taillamp, Position
RT POS
Lamps (Option)
RUN
Ignition 3
Rear
Taillamps, Position
STDBY LAMP Lamps
(Option)
TRUNK RELSE Trunk Release Motor
Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,
BCK/UP LAMP Reverse
Inside Rearview Mirror
Circuit
Breakers
PWR SEATS
Diodes
SPARE
Joint
Connector
J/C
Usage
Power Seats
Usage
Spare
Usage
Splice Pack (Green)
5-131
Passenger’s Side
Fuses
AIRBAG/IGN
CNSTR/VENT
DIFF PUMP
5-132
Usage
Sensing and Diagnostic Monitor,
Automatic Occupant Sensor,
Passenger Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint
Canister Vent Solenoid
Rear Differential Pump
Fuses
Usage
Front Passenger Door Module,
FRT PDM
Right Power Subwoofer
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
HTD STR
Heated Steering Wheel
RF
Front Passenger Heated Seat,
HTD/SEAT/XM S-Band™ Antenna
Fuses
Usage
RDO/ONSTAR Radio, OnStar®
INT LAMP
Interior Lamps
Left
Turn Signal, Lane Departure
LT TRN/LDW Warning
(Option)
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
REAR/FOG
Rear Fog Lamps (Option)
RIM
Rear Integration Module
Rear Integration Module, Rear
Parking Aid, Inside Rearview Mirror,
RIM /RPA
Lock Module, Power
/ISRVM /CLM Column
Sounder, Active Front Steering
(AFS), Supervisory Control Module
UHBEC Run, CRNK Relay Coil,
RUN/CRNK
Rear Fog Lamp Relay Coil
S/ROOF
Sun Roof Module (Option)
SPARE
Spare
STOP LAMPS Stop Lamps
Turn Signal, Side Blind Zone
RT TRN/SZBA Right
Alert (Option)
Relays
DIFF PUMP
FUEL PUMP
INT LAMP
REAR DEFOG
REAR/FOG
RUN/CRNK
SPARE
STOP LAMP
Circuit
Breakers
WINDOW
MTRS
Usage
Rear Differential Pump (Option)
Fuel Pump
Interior Lamps
Rear Defogger
Rear Fog Lamps (Option)
Ignition 1
Spare
Stop Lamp
Usage
Power Window Motors Circuit
Breaker
Diodes
Usage
TRUNK DIODE Trunk Release
Joint
Connector
J/C
Usage
Splice Pack (Blue)
5-133
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Brake Fluid Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
1.1 qt
1.0 L
11.2 qt
10.6 L
Cooling System
3.6L Engine
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
13.4 qt
12.7 L
4.6L Engine
11.7 qt
11.1 L
2.6 qt
2.5 L
3.6L Engine
6.0 qt
5.7 L
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
9.0 qt
8.5 L
Cooling System — Intercooler 4.4L (V-Series) Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
4.6L Engine
Fuel Tank
5-134
8.0 qt
7.6 L
17.5 gal
66.2 L
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
6.7 qt
6.3 L
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
6-Speed Automatic
6-Speed Automatic (V-Series)
Wheel Nut Torque
6.5 qt
6.2 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.6L SIDI V6
V
Automatic
0.044 in (1.11 mm)
4.4L DOHC V8 (V-Series)
D
Automatic
0.040 in (1.02 mm)
4.6L DOHC V8
A
Automatic
0.050 in (1.27 mm)
STS-V Engine Data
Engine
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
Horsepower
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
469hp (350 kW) @
6400 rpm
439 lb ft (595 Nm) @
3800 rpm
4.4L
9.0:1
5-135
✍ NOTES
5-136
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-8
Owner Checks and Services ..........................6-10
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-10
At Least Once a Month .................................6-11
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-16
Maintenance Record .....................................6-18
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a
week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-24.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-8 for further information.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
To purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 tells what
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
6-3
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-15. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of this
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service
be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures
and wear. See Tires on page 5-54. If tire rotation is
recommended for the vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 5-71 and “Tire Wear
Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on page 6-11.
6-4
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC),
service is required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system may not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-21 for information on the Engine
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, the following services, checks, and inspections
are required:
❑ Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 5-18. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-21. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
See footnote (k).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23.
See footnote (m).
❑ Check tires for inflation pressures and wear. See Tires
on page 5-54. If tire rotation is recommended for the
vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-71 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least
Once a Month on page 6-11.
❑ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
❑ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid
levels. If the vehicle has the 4.4L V8 supercharged
engine, check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid as
needed.
❑ Perform any needed additional services. See
“Additional Required Services” in this section.
❑ Inspect suspension and steering components.
See footnote (b).
❑ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
❑ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
❑ Inspect restraint system components.
See footnote (e).
❑ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23.
See footnote (p).
Replace passenger compartment air
filter. See footnote (g).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change
transfer case fluid (severe service).
See footnotes (q) and (r).
6-6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change
transfer case fluid (normal service).
See footnote (q).
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
•
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (j).
•
4.4L Supercharged Engine: Intercooler
system service (or every five years,
whichever occurs first). See footnote (l).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (n).
•
If using DOT-4 brake fluid, change brake
fluid at a regular maintenance service
every two years. See footnote (i).
6-7
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking
brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-52 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 5-120 for more information.
6-8
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-66.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all
hinges and latches, including those for the hood, rear
compartment, glove box door, and console door. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as limousine service.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(i) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush, and refill
brake hydraulic system at a regular maintenance service
every two years. This service can be complex; you should
have your dealer/retailer perform this service. See Brakes
on page 5-39.
(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(l) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27.
(m) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(p) If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 (VIN Code V) engine,
replace the engine air cleaner filter every 40,000 miles
(64 000 km).
(q) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper
installation. Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed,
clear, and free of debris. During any maintenance, if a
power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the
underbody, care should be taken to not directly spray the
transfer case output seals. High pressure water can
overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case
fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be replaced.
(r) Change transfer case fluid if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as high performance operation or taxi,
police, or delivery service.
6-9
Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-18.
6-10
Intercooler Coolant Level Check
(4.4L Supercharged Engine)
Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level
Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38.
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated
to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-64. If the vehicle has a spare tire, check to
make sure it is stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-104.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation is recommended if the vehicle has the same
size tires at all four wheel positions and may be required
for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil
Life System service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-71.
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-33.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-11
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
{ CAUTION:
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-33.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for service.
6-12
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
see Engine Oil on page 5-18.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit,
check the sealant expiration date printed on the
instruction label of the kit at least once a year.
See your dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
System
page 5-27.
6-13
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Intercooler
System
(4.4L V8
Supercharged
engine)
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant.
Hydraulic
Brake System
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
6-14
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Front Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Transfer Case
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element
3.6L and 4.6L Engines
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L Engine
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
4.6L Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
3.6L Engine
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
4.6L Engine
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 22 in (56.5 cm)
Passenger Side – 21 in (53.0 cm)
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
25798271
15813300
A2944C
A3078C
25177917
890175271
89017342
88957450
PF2129
PF261
PF61
CF13C
92220447
12592619
12571535
41-990
41-991
41-987
88958361
88958359
—
—
1
Notice: If the vehicle is an STS-V model, the engine uses a special oil filter. The use of any other engine
oil filter could lead to filter failure and result in severe engine damage. Damage caused by use of the
wrong engine oil filter would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing
4.4L V8 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
6-16
4.6L V8 Engine
6-17
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-19
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-20
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7
Roadside Service ...........................................7-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10
Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-15
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-17
OnStar® ......................................................7-18
Navigation System ........................................7-18
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ...................................7-18
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern
will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is
why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after the following the procedure outlined
in Steps One and Two. General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a
no-charge mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors
of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
7-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to
the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following
address:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred
GM Dealers or Retailers.
• My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining your
vehicle.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within gmcanada.com.
7-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
7-6
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-7
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or
the same type of claim is made many times.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
7-8
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:
Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is
your responsibility for the repair or replacement of
the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with the
most direct route or the most scenic route. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the
5 year/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain
warranty period. Items considered are hotel, meals,
and rental car.
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a
Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your car
towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and
tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders are required. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
non-public road or highway.
7-9
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Transportation Options
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty in
both the U.S. and Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
7-10
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair. If
you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see your
dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the
allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local,
and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements
vary and may include minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-11
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians
and state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
7-12
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of
mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-7 for
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-13
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy repair
limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
7-14
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
7-17
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-50 in this
manual for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-18
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-46
Adaptive Cruise Control ................................... 3-20
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-64
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-113
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-23
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-48
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-59
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-58
Airbag System ................................................ 1-51
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-64
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-57
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-59
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-64
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-57
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? .................................................. 1-58
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-56
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-53
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-47
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-12
Antenna, Backglass ....................................... 3-134
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ..................................................... 3-134
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-63
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-110
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-108
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-112
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-109
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-106
Finish Care ............................................... 5-109
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-111
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-107
Interior Cleaning ........................................ 5-105
Leather .................................................... 5-107
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-111
Speaker Covers ......................................... 5-108
Tires ........................................................ 5-111
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-111
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-108
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-108
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-110
Wood Panels ............................................ 5-107
Appointments, Scheduling Service ..................... 7-10
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-47
Audio System ................................................. 3-97
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-131
Backglass Antenna ..................................... 3-134
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-116
Radio Personalization ................................. 3-126
1
Audio System (cont.)
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-133
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-98
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-130
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-134
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-98
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-25
Operation ................................................... 2-30
B
Backglass Antenna ........................................ 3-134
Battery .......................................................... 5-42
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-42
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-40
Inadvertent Power Saver .............................. 3-42
Load Management ....................................... 3-41
Bluetooth® .................................................... 3-116
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-39
Brakes .......................................................... 5-39
System Warning Light .................................. 3-62
Braking ........................................................... 4-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-25
2
Bulb Replacement ...........................................
Back-Up Lamps ...........................................
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamp Aiming ........................................
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...........
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Buying New Tires ...........................................
5-51
5-52
5-51
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-74
C
Calibration ............................................... 1-6, 2-38
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements ............................................... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Canadian Owners ............................................... iii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-124
Carbon Monoxide ........................... 2-15, 2-36, 4-21
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-108
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 3-111
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-60
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-81
Charging System Light .................................... 3-61
Check
Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-66
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-112
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-35
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-31
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-39
Older Children ............................................. 1-28
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-47
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-37
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-47
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-110
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-109
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-106
Finish Care ............................................... 5-109
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-107
Interior ..................................................... 5-105
Leather .................................................... 5-107
Speaker Covers ......................................... 5-108
Tires ........................................................ 5-111
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-111
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-108
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-108
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-110
Wood Panels ............................................ 5-107
Climate Control System
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-54
Dual .......................................................... 3-48
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-52
Rear .......................................................... 3-53
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-98
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 5-104
Compass ................................................. 1-6, 2-38
Competitive Driving ......................................... 4-17
Competitive Driving Mode ................................ 4-11
Compressor Kit
Storing ....................................................... 5-94
Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant ............................ 5-87
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-60
Coolant
Engine ....................................................... 5-27
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-65
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-64
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-34
Cooling System .............................................. 5-26
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-16
Cruise Control, Forward Collision
Alert (FAC) System ....................................... 3-9
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-70
Cupholders .................................................... 2-60
3
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-10
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-7
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ........................................ 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-14
Roadside Service .......................................... 7-7
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-72
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-72
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-79
Other Messages .......................................... 3-96
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-17
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-19
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-19
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-20
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-18
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-24
Winter ........................................................ 4-21
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-48
D
E
Daytime Running Lamp ................................... 3-36
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Disc, MP3 .................................................... 3-111
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Door
Locks ........................................................ 2-13
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-13
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-14
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-14
EDR ............................................................. 7-16
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-113
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-113
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 5-113
Power Windows and Other Power
Options ................................................. 5-113
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-118
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-114
4
Electrical System (cont.)
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-113
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-23
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-66
Coolant ...................................................... 5-27
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-29
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-65
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-64
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-16
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-36
Oil ............................................................. 5-18
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-21
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-36
Overheating ................................................ 5-34
Starting ...................................................... 2-27
Enhanced StabiliTrak® ....................................... 4-6
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-41
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-17
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-27
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-40
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-23
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-111
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................. 3-13
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-84
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-94
Flat Tire, Storing ........................................... 5-102
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-25
Power Steering ........................................... 5-37
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-38
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-38
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-70
Forward Collision Alert (FAC) System .................. 3-9
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-49
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-7
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-71
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-113
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-118
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-114
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-113
5
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-65
Fuel .......................................................... 3-71
Speedometer .............................................. 3-57
Tachometer ................................................. 3-57
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-53
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-60
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-50
Headlamp Wiring ........................................... 5-113
Headlamps .................................................... 3-32
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-51
Daytime Running Lamp ................................ 3-36
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 3-13
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-51
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-51
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
6
Headlamps (cont.)
On Reminder .............................................. 3-36
Washer ...................................................... 3-16
Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-36
Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-43
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heated Steering Wheel ..................................... 3-7
Heater ........................................................... 3-48
Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-29
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-70
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-65
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-19
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-20
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-12
I
Ignition Positions .............................................
Immobilizer ....................................................
Immobilizer Operation ......................................
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .......................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...............
Inflation - Tire Pressure ...................................
Inflator Kit, Tire ...............................................
2-26
2-24
2-24
3-42
1-31
5-64
5-87
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-40
Cluster ....................................................... 3-56
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
K
Keyless Access System ..................................... 2-4
Keyless Access System, Operation ...................... 2-5
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamp
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Lamps
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ....................
Reading .....................................................
Twilight Sentinel® ........................................
Lane Departure Warning ..................................
Lane Departure Warning Light ..........................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
5-56
3-66
3-40
3-42
3-41
3-38
2-48
3-64
1-21
LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-39
Lifting the Vehicle, Tires ................................... 5-82
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-58
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-63
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-62
Charging System ......................................... 3-61
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-70
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-64
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-70
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-70
Lane Departure Warning ............................... 3-64
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 3-70
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-69
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-59
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-57
Security ..................................................... 3-69
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-63
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-65
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-63
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-41
Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-41
Lights ............................................................ 3-32
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 3-13
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-36
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ..................................... 4-12
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-24
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-15
7
Locks
Door .......................................................... 2-13
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-15
Power Door ................................................ 2-13
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-14
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-14
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-39
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-2
M
Magnetic Ride Control ..................................... 4-12
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-10
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-11
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-11
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-8
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-18
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ......................... 6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
8
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Using .......................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-66
Memory Mirrors .............................................. 2-77
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-77
Memory Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-77
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-79
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-38
Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass
and Temperature ........................................ 1-6
Memory ..................................................... 2-77
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-40
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-41
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-41
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-40
Park Tilt ..................................................... 2-41
MP3 ............................................................ 3-111
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-5
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-18
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ..................................................... 3-116
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-25
O
P
Odometer ...................................................... 3-57
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-15
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-18
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-69
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-21
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-28
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-18
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-50
Operation, Universal Home Remote
System ...................................................... 2-54
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-52
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-46
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-40
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-41
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-41
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-40
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-36
Owner Checks and Services ............................. 6-10
Owners, Canadian .............................................. iii
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-111
Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-41
Park
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-34
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-35
Park Aid ........................................................ 2-42
Park Brake .................................................... 2-33
Park Tilt Mirrors .............................................. 2-41
Parking
Assist ........................................................ 2-42
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-35
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-59
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-54
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-59
Passing ......................................................... 4-15
Perchlorate Materials Requirements,
California ..................................................... 5-4
Phone
Bluetooth® ................................................ 3-116
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 2-13
Electrical System ....................................... 5-113
Inadvertent Battery Saver ............................. 3-42
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-2
9
Power (cont.)
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Retained Accessory ..................................... 2-27
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-37
Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ....... 3-6
Windows .................................................... 2-19
Privacy .......................................................... 7-16
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-17
Navigation System ....................................... 7-18
OnStar ....................................................... 7-18
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-18
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-14
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy ...... 7-18
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-98
Radios
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-116
Radio Personalization ................................. 3-126
Reception ................................................. 3-133
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-98
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-130
Rainsense™ II Wipers ..................................... 3-14
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-41
10
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-48
Limited-Slip ................................................. 4-12
Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-53
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-14
Rear Heated Seats ........................................... 1-6
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-38
Rearview Mirror with Compass and
Temperature ................................................. 1-6
Reclining Seatbacks, Power ............................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-29
Remote, Keyless Access System ........................ 2-4
Remote Vehicle Start ....................................... 2-11
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-97
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-96
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-15
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-52
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-15
General Motors ........................................... 7-15
United States Government ............................ 7-14
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-66
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-67
Retained Accessory Power ............................... 2-27
Roadside
Service ........................................................ 7-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-24
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-16
Run-Flat Tires ................................................ 5-62
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-37
S
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-57
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 5-108
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-12
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-21
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-27
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-27
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-7
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iv
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
Heated and Ventilated Seats ........................... 1-3
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Heated Seats - Rear ..................................... 1-6
Memory ..................................................... 2-77
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-2
Power Reclining Seatbacks ............................. 1-4
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-45
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-47
Security Light ................................................. 3-69
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle ................................................ 5-5
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements ............................................ 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-66
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15
Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 7-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-64
Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-98
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-111
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-34
Shifting Out of Park ........................................ 2-35
Side Blind Zone Alert ...................................... 2-44
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire
Compact ................................................... 5-104
Installing .................................................... 5-97
Removing ................................................... 5-96
Storing ..................................................... 5-102
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-124
Speedometer .................................................. 3-57
11
Stabilitrak® System ........................................... 4-6
Start Vehicle, Remote ...................................... 2-11
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-27
Steering ........................................................ 4-12
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-131
Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ..................... 2-77
Steering Wheel, Heated ..................................... 3-7
Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and
Telescopic Steering Column ............................ 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-60
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-60
Cupholders ................................................. 2-60
Glove Box .................................................. 2-60
Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ......... 5-94
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-23
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-21
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-60
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-57
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-63
Telescopic Steering Column, Power
Tilt Wheel .................................................... 3-6
Theft - Deterrent System .................................. 2-21
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-130
12
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-21
Immobilizer ................................................. 2-24
Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-24
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-98
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-65
Tire Sealant
Storing ....................................................... 5-94
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ............................................... 5-110
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-74
Chains ....................................................... 5-81
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-94
Cleaning ................................................... 5-111
Compact Spare Tire ................................... 5-104
Different Size .............................................. 5-76
High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-65
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-84
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-64
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-71
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-97
Lifting the Vehicle ........................................ 5-82
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-68
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-66
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-97
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-96
Tires (cont.)
Run-Flat ..................................................... 5-62
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .......... 5-102
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ................... 5-87
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-56
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-59
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-77
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-79
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-79
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-73
Winter Tires ................................................ 5-55
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-29
Towing a Trailer .................................. 4-31, 4-32
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-29
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................. 4-10
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-63
Enhanced Stabilitrak® .................................... 4-6
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................. 4-12
Magnetic Ride Control .................................. 4-12
Stabilitrak® System ........................................ 4-6
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-25
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-30
Trunk ............................................................ 2-15
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-38
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................
Universal Home Remote System .......................
Operation ...................................................
2-42
5-77
2-53
2-54
V
Valet Lockout Switch ....................................... 2-23
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-3
Loading ...................................................... 4-24
Running While Parked .................................. 2-37
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-112
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-112
Vehicle Personalization .................................... 2-61
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ......... 2-77
Vehicle, Remote Start ...................................... 2-11
Ventilated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-52
Visors ........................................................... 2-21
13
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-55
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-79
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iv
Washer, Headlamps ........................................ 3-16
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-79
Different Size .............................................. 5-76
Replacement ............................................... 5-79
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-37
Windows ....................................................... 2-18
Power ........................................................ 2-19
Windshield
Rainsense™ II Wipers .................................. 3-14
Replacement ............................................... 5-52
Washer ...................................................... 3-15
14
Windshield (cont.)
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-38
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-52
Wiper Blades, Cleaning .............................. 5-110
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-113
Wipers ....................................................... 3-13
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-21
Winter Tires ................................................... 5-55
Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-36
X
XM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-114
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-134
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Download PDF

advertising